Home

FL1E Series User`s Manual - Clearwater Technologies Inc.

1. e e Ye K3 3 2 e _ _ _ Ly kA stipe A s4 K3 s3 K4 o _ K1 Kol K3 K4 y1 X N kd e e eo e Pump Tracking Dry run Drinking water time protection supply line The pump and a solenoid valve are controlled by means of a pressure switch and 3 float switches which are installed in the rainwater reservoir The pump must be switched on when the pressure level in the boiler drops below minimum After the operating pressure is reached the pump is switched off again after a tracking time of a few seconds has expired The tracking time prevents oscillation of the water pump if water is drawn off over a longer period of time IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 7 3 Service water pump system with FL1E H12RCC uu i K1 y1 X Pump Drinking water supply line Apart from the IDEC SmartRelay all you need is a pressure switch and the float switches to control the pump If you are using a 3 phase AC motor you must use a contactor relay to switch the pump For single phase AC pump systems you must provide a contactor relay if the power consumption of the AC motor exceeds the capacity of the output relay Q1 The power consumption of a solenoid valve is usually low enough to allow direct controllin
2. Scrolling the circuit program using the key The figure above shows you three views of the IDEC SmartRelay display which represent the circuit program As you can see IDEC SmartRelay interconnects the blocks using their numbers IDEC SmartRelay Manual 61 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Advantages of block numbers You can connect almost any block to an input of the current block by means of its block number In this way you can reuse the interim results of logical or other operations reduce programming effort save memory space and clean up your circuit layout To do so however you need to know how IDEC SmartRelay has named the blocks Note We advise you to create an organizational program chart You will find this a valuable aid when you create the circuit program because you can enter in this chart all the block numbers that IDEC SmartRelay assigns By using the WindLGC software to program IDEC SmartRelay you can directly create a function chart of your circuit program WindLGC also allows you to assign eight character names to up to 100 blocks and to view these on the IDEC SmartRelay display in parameter assignment mode see Chapter 3 4 62 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 3 From ci
3. 1 1 1 1 1 j i ee er ee 2an Eis th oh th i e So hoa hk a a We at ac on ke ee Qio ae ae Cycle 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 2 5 OR Circuit diagram of a parallel circuit Symbol in IDEC with several normally open contacts SmartRelay J 4 The output status of the OR elementis only 1 if at least one input is 1 i e at least one of the contacts is closed At an unused block input x x 0 OR function logic table 1 2 3 4 Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 118 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 2 6 NOR not OR Circuit diagram of a series circuit with Symbol in IDEC several normally closed contacts SmartRelay J gt Dole 3 a oN K K K i The output status of the NOR is only 1 if all inputs are 0 i e if switched off The NOR output is set to 0 when one of the inputs is switched on logical 1 status At an unused block input x x 0 NOR function logic table 1 2 3 4 Q 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 119 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www
4. No Program Press ESC Circuit program is See Main menu busy RUN gt Stop l gt Y e5 Mo 09 00 HEH cet Param Parameter setting Chapter 5 1 1 cont 2008 05 26 g Default values setting Chapter 5 2 cont Prg Name i Display of the program name See Start menu A Parameter assignment menu l Main menu ESC gt Stop Eo Program LppEdit See Programming menu y Card pp EF gt Card See Transfer menu eres Setup bpt ock See Setup menu gt Stop gt Yes Start 5 See Start menu Mo 09 00 2008 05 26 Programming menu ESC gt Stop gt gt Program Edit Password _ pEdit Prg J Editing the program Chapter 3 7 cont v gt Edit Name Editing the program name Chapter 3 7 4 v r AQ Selecting analog output values and type Chapters 3 7 11 and 3 7 12 v gt Memor y gt Show available memory space Chapter 3 8 v gt Clear Prg Deleting the program Chapter 3 7 13 v gt Password Input change of password Chapter 3 7 5 v gt Msg Config Configure global parameters for message texts Chapter 4 4 23 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 329 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay menu structure Transfer menu ESC gt Stop gt gt Card
5. B3 1 lt Parameter protection mode Al 00000 Differential value for the on off A2 0 0 0 0 0 threshold Press gt B3 2 A 0 0 1 0 0 Gain B 00000 lt offset p 4 Decimals in the message text View in parameter assignment mode example B3 Al 00010 Aen 00020 Ax 00005 0Q 1 Axis out of the range of Aen A2 to Aen A1 B3 A2 00010 184 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 20 Analog amplifier Short description This special function amplifies the value of an analog input and outputs the result at an analog output Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input Ax You apply the analog signal to be Ax 47A ag amplified at input Ax Par 4 4 Use the analog inputs Al1 AI8 the analog memory markers AM1 AM6 the block number of a function with analog output or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 Parameter A Gain Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output AQ This special function has an analog output This output can only be connected with the analog input of a function an analog memory marker or an analog output connector AQ1 AQ2 Range of values for AQ 32767 32767 Alt Al8 0 10 V corresponds with 0 1000 internal value
6. Gain and offset parameters Please note the information on gain and offset parameters in Chapter 4 3 6 Parameter p number of decimals Applies only to the AQ value in a message text Functional description The function fetches the analog signal of input Ax This value is multiplied by the value of the A gain parameter and parameter B offset is then added to the product Axegain offset actual value Ax The actual value Ax is output at AQ IDEC SmartRelay Manual 185 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Analog output Analog output can only process values between 0 and 1000 Connect an Analog amplifier in front of the analog output to convert the analog output of the special function within a range between 0 and 1000 The analog output range 5000 to 5000 of a special function is converted to a range between 0 and 1000 in the block diagram below Analog amplifier Analog output Actual value A ctual value Ax pace Changed value Ax 5000 5000 Gain 0 1 Offset 500 Point 0 When an analog signal out of the range between 0 to 1000 is inputted to an analog output The analog output module operates as below for the analog signal out of the range between 0 to 1000 e When the type of analog outputs is set to 0 10V 0 20mA When internal values less than zero are inputted to the analog output the analog output mo
7. IDEC SmartRelay Manual 205 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Functional description In parameter assignment mode the output is set with a signal at input En if the Switch parameter is set to On and confirmed with OK Whether the function was configured for pushbutton or switching action is of no concern here The output is reset to 0 in the following three cases e After a1 to 0 transition at input En e When the function was configured for momentary pushbutton action and one cycle has expired since it was switched on e When the position Off was selected at the Switch parameter and confirmed with OK in parameter assignment mode If retentivity is not set output Q is initialized after a power failure according to your configuration at the Start parameter Setting the Par parameter View in programming mode example 1 Select the Softkey function 2 Select input En and confirm with OK The cursor is now positioned below Par 3 Change to the input mode of Par Confirm with OK the cursor is now positioned to On B33 The status is not retentive On S a The function is set for momentary pushbutton action Start On Q is set in the first cycle after the program start To change Par to Switch action and the initialization status
8. The first element of the Co list is the Input 1 character namely 11 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 73 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Note Press w to go the start of the Co list 11 12 to lo Press A to go to the end of the Co list lo hi to l1 Inputs F1 F2 F3 and F4 are new as of the FL1E device series They correspond to the four function keys on the optional Text Dis play Press OK 11 is now connected to the input of the OR block The cursor jumps to the next input of the OR block The display now shows Your complete circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay up to now B1 B1 7 1 a 21 a Q1 Q1 Now you connect input 12 to the input of the OR block You already know how to do this 1 Switch to editing mode Press OK 2 Select the Co list Press V or A 3 Confirm the Co list with Press OK 4 Select 12 Press Vor A 5 Apply l2 Press OK 12 is now connected to the input of the OR block The display now shows I1 I2 B1 74 Phone 800 894 0412 Your circuit program layout in IDEC SmartRelay up to now B1 ii 21 I2 Q1 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay We do not need the last two inputs of the OR block for this circuit program You can mark t
9. Trg n The bold section of the timing diagram also Q JL a appears in the symbol of Ta is running The gt The N 1 the edge triggered T 0 interval time delay relay Timing diagram B Trg Q Timing diagram for the sample A a configuration N 2 i Th TH Tp Ty Functional description A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg triggers the time T Time Low After the time T has expired output Q is set for the duration of Ty Time High If there is a further 0 to 1 transition retriggering pulse at input Trg before the preset time T Tp has expired T is reset and the pulse pause cycle is restarted If retentivity is not set output Q and the time are reset after a power failure IDEC SmartRelay Manual 141 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Setting the Par parameter View in programming mode example B25 1 R Protection mode and retentivity TL 02 005 lt 1 Interpulse width TH 03 005 Pulse width Press gt B25 2 N 1 lt Number of pulse pause cycles example View in parameter assignment mode example B25 TL 02 00s TH 03 00s Ta 01 155 Current pulse width TL or TH 4 4 7 Asynchronous pulse generator Short description The output pulse shape can be modified by reconfiguring the pulse pause ratio Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description
10. Function Program Rem memory memory Basic functions AND 12 AND with Edge Detection 12 NAND not AND 12 NAND with Edge Detection 12 OR 12 NOR not OR 12 XOR exclusive OR 8 NOT Negation 4 Special functions Timers On delay 8 3 Off delay 12 3 On Off delay 12 3 Retentive on delay 12 3 Interval time delay relay Pulse output 8 3 Edge triggered interval time delay relay 16 4 Asynchronous pulse generator 12 3 Random generator 12 Stairwell Light Switch 12 3 Dual function switch 16 3 Seven day time switch 20 Twelve month time switch 12 Counters Up down counter 28 5 105 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Function Program Rem i memory memory Operating hours counter 28 9 Frequency trigger 16 Analog Analog trigger 16 Analog differential trigger 16 Analog comparator 24 Analog value monitoring 20 Analog amplifier 12 Pulse Width Modulator PWM 24 Analog math 20 Analog math error detection 12 1 Analog multiplexer 20 3 Analog ramp control 36 PI controller 40 2 Others Latching relay 8 1 Current impulse relay 12 1 Message texts 8 Softkey 8 2 Shift register 12 1 Bytes in the Rem memory area if retentivity is enabled Utilization of memory areas The system indicates that there is insuffic
11. RS485A M Powersupply Communication interface The power connection is non polar If you connect a DC power supply to the Text Display you can connect the positive supply wire or negative supply wire to either the left or right side Note IDEC recommends that you protect the Text Display with a 0 5 A safety fuse on the power supply 34 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 3 3 Connecting IDEC SmartRelay inputs Requiremen ts At the inputs you connect sensor elements such as momentary pushbuttons switches light barriers daylight control switches etc Sensor characteristics for IDEC SmartRelay FL1E H12RCE FL1E H12SND FL1B FL1B FL1E B12RCE MO8B2R2 MO8B1S2 13 16 14 12 17 18 13 16 11 12 17 18 11 18 11 18 Signal status 0 lt 5V DC lt 5VDC lt 5VDC lt 5VDC lt 5VDC lt 5VDC Input current lt 0 85 mA lt 0 05 mA lt 0 85 mA lt 0 05 mA lt 0 85mA lt 0 85 mA Signal status 1 gt 8 5 V DC gt 85VDC gt 12VDC gt 12VDC gt 85VDC gt 12vbc 4 Input current gt 1 5mA gt 0 1mA gt 2mA gt 0 15mA gt 1 5mA gt 2mA FL1E H12RCA FL1E H12RCA FL1E H12RCC FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCA FL1E B12RCA FL1E B12RCC FL1E B12RCC FL1B FL1B FL1B FL1B M08D2R2 AC
12. Noise emission EN 55011 A Limit class B group 1 EN 55022 B EN 50081 1 domestic area Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharge Severity 3 6 kV contact discharge Electromagnetic fields IEC 61000 4 3 Field strength 1 V m and 10 V m HF currents on cables and IEC 61000 4 6 10 V cable shielding Burst pulses IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV supply and signal Severity 3 lines High energy surge pulse IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV power lines applies only to Severity 3 symmetrical FL1E H12RCC 2 kV power lines FL1E B12RCC asymmetrical Safety to IEC Clearance and creepage IEC 60664 IEC 61131 2 Fulfilled distance rating EN 50178 cULus to UL 508 CSA C22 2 No 142 With FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC also IEC60730 1 Insulation strength IEC 61131 2 Fulfilled Cycle time Cycle time per function lt 0 1 ms Startup Startup time at power up typ 9 s Note Use a surge absorber noise cut transformer or noise filter to protect products rated at 12 24V DC or 24V DC power type modules against surge 298 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay Manual Technical data A 2 Technical data FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC Power supply FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC Input voltage 100 240 V AC DC Permissible range 85 265 V AC 100 253 V DC Permissible mains frequency 47 63 Hz Power consumption 100 VAC 25 40 mA 240V AC 20 30 mA
13. Tg N L J The bold section of l res i the timing diagram Q i eai u is also shown in the i o optio n on off dela ia TH tbe ae e TH symbol g Ta expires wi i ae j 1 T D al A TL eae e TL Ta expires CILT Functional description The time Ty is triggered with a 0 to 1 transition at input Trg If the status at input Trg is 1 at least for the duration of the time Ty the output is setto 1 on expiration of the time Ty the output follows the input with on delay The time is reset when the signal at input Trg is reset to 0 before the time T4 has expired A 1 to O transition at input Trg triggers the time T_ If the status at input Trg is 0 at least for the duration of the signal T the output is set to 0 on expiration of the time T the output follows the input with off delay The time is reset when the signal at input Trg changes to 1 again before the time T has expired If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure IDEC SmartRelay Manual 137 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 4 Retentive on delay Short description A one shot at the input triggers a configurable on delay time The output is set when this time has expired Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input Tr A signal at input Trg Trigger triggers Tra T i i the a dela ae ponte R Jq rra ee Far Input
14. Note This additional password protection function is only available in the Text Display with version number 4 or later This function is only available under the following conditions e The version number of both the IDEC SmartRelay Base and the Text Display installed is at least version 4 e IDEC SmartRelay is currently in RUN mode and you want to switch to STOP mode There is only one password that you can assign for IDEC SmartRelay You can only assign it from the IDEC SmartRelay base module or from WindLGC To change IDEC SmartRelay from RUN to STOP from the Text Display you must enter the password from the Text Display as described below in the section Changing IDEC SmartRelay from RUN to STOP mode from the Text Display Assigning a password from the IDEC SmartRelay Base module 78 A password can have a maximum length of 10 characters and consists only of uppercase letters On IDEC SmartRelay the password can be assigned edited or deactivated only in the Password menu To enter a password follow these steps in the programming menu 1 Move the gt cursor to Password Press Wor A 2 Confirm the Password Press OK Press V or A to move up and down the alphabet to select your letters Because IDEC SmartRelay only provides IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay uppercase letters for
15. AAAA ADDR Networking on the AS interface bus To make the connection to the AS interface bus you need a communications capable IDEC SmartRelay variant e IDEC SmartRelay base module CM AS I To be able to send data across the AS interface bus to IDEC SmartRelay and to receive data from it in the same way you also need e an AS interface power supply and an AS interface master IDEC SmartRelay can only be accepted as a slave on the AS interface bus This means that it is not possible to directly exchange data between two IDEC SmartRelay devices Data is always exchanged across the AS interface master IDEC SmartRelay Manual 49 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring ZN 50 Warning The AS Interface and IDEC SmartRelay systems must never be connected together electrically Use safe isolation acc to IEC 61131 2 EN 50178 UL 508 CSA C22 2 No 42 Logic Assignments IDEC SmartRelay sys AS Interface system tem Inputs Output data bits In DO Ina D1 Ins2 D2 Ins3 D3 Outputs Output data bits Qn DO Qnat D1 Qn 2 D2 Qn D3 n depends on the plug in position of the expansion module relative to the IDEC SmartRelay base module It indicates the number of the input or output in IDEC SmartRelay program code Note En
16. A pressure sensor converts a pressure of 1000 mbar into a voltage of 0 V and a pressure of 5000 mbar into a voltage of 10 V Actual value internal value gain offset thus 1000 0 A B i e offset B 1000 5000 1000 A 1000 i e gain A 4 126 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Example of analog values Process Voltage Internal r Value shown variable V value Salt Offset Ax 30 C 0 0 0 1 30 30 0 C 3 300 0 1 30 0 70 C 10 1000 0 1 30 70 1000 mbar 0 0 4 1000 1000 3700 mbar 6 75 675 4 1000 3700 5000 mbar 10 1000 4 1000 5000 0 0 0 01 0 0 5 500 0 01 0 5 10 1000 0 01 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 5 500 1 0 500 10 1000 1 0 1000 0 0 10 0 0 5 500 10 0 5000 10 1000 10 0 10000 0 0 0 01 5 5 5 500 0 01 5 10 10 1000 0 01 5 15 0 0 1 500 500 5 500 1 500 1000 10 1000 1 500 1500 0 0 1 200 200 5 500 1 200 300 10 1000 1 200 800 0 0 10 10000 10000 10 1000 10 10000 0 0 02 2 0 01 0 0 0 02 2 0 1 0 0 0 02 2 1 0 2 0 02 2 10 0 20 A sample application is found in the description of the Analog comparator SF on Page 177 For further information on analog inputs refer to Chapter 4 1 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 127 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay
17. If retentivity is disabled the shift function restarts at S1 or S8 after a power failure When enabled retentivity always applies to all shift register bits Note The special function shift register can be used only once in the cir cuit program 208 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Timing diagram S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 Setting the Par parameter View in programming mode In Trg Q Dir F o 1 o0 1 1 0 A OO i O 1 Fi O70 0 ts 0 1 40 0 _0 0 0 T 0771 S4 7 0 example wo o o o 10 w1 0 0 0 OT 0 o 1 0 0 0m0 oo 14 1 o 1 Shift up Shift down B3 R Q S Press B3 R Q S H Retentivity enabled Preset etc You can select S8 S1 This special function is not available in parameter assignment mode IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 209 IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 26 Analog Multiplexer Short description This special function outputs one of four predefined analog values or 0 at the analog output Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input En A change in status from 0 to 1 at input En Enable switches a parameterized analog value to the output AQ depending on the value
18. Of the fifty possible message texts that you can configure you can select any number of them to be from the first language and any number from the second language For example you could configure fifty message text function blocks that have a single message text for Character Set 1 Alternatively you could configure twenty five message text function blocks each of which has two message texts one for Character Set 1 and one for Character Set 2 Any combination is valid such that the total does not exceed fifty Within a single message text the text must be from one character set You can edit message texts in any of the supported character sets from WindLGC From the IDEC SmartRelay base module you can only edit text using characters from the IS08859 1 character set The language and therefore character set of a message text is independent of the language setting for the IDEC SmartRelay display menus They can be different 194 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Chinese Character Set The IDEC SmartRelay base module and Text Display support the Chinese character set GB 231 2 for the People s Republic of China The devices use Microsoft Windows encoding for this character set The Windows encoding allows the devices to display the same characters as shown in the WindLGC message text editor when you are using a Chinese emul
19. SmartRelay ok CopyProtect Setup menu ESC gt Clock Note The BM Al NUM selection is LCD only available on base modules that support four analog inputs Menu Lang BM AI NUM Parameter assignment mode Parameter assignment menu gt Stop Set Param Set Prg Name For more details on these menus refer to Appendix D The Text Display menus provide configuration settings for the Text Display These menus are a subset of the IDEC SmartRelay menus and are operated in much the same way Appendix section D 2 shows the Text Display menus 68 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 6 Writing and starting the circuit program After you have designed a circuit you want to write it to your IDEC SmartRelay The small example below shows how to do this 3 6 1 Selecting programming mode You have connected IDEC SmartRelay to the power supply and switched it on The display now shows you the message No Program Press ESC Switch IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode by pressing ESC This will take you to the main menu of IDEC SmartRelay gt Program Card Setup Start The first character in the first line is the gt cursor Press A and W to move the gt cursor up and down Move it to Program and confirm with OK IDEC SmartRelay opens the
20. When multiple message text functions are triggered with En 1 IDEC SmartRelay displays the message text with the highest priority 0 lowest 127 highest This also means that IDEC SmartRelay displays a newly activated message text only if its priority is higher than that of previously activated message texts After a message text is disabled or acknowledged the function automatically shows the previously active message text that takes the highest priority You can change the view and the message texts by pressing the keys A and V IDEC SmartRelay Manual 197 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Example This is how two message texts could be shown Display field of IDEC SmartRelay in RUN mode Motor 5 STOP AT rar 10 12 lt Example Message text with priority 30 1 Action w Key A Motor 2 3000 PP hours Example Message text with priority 10 MAI NTENANCE w Press amp Date and current time of day gt OOOO only for versions with real time clock 2003 01 27 Message Ticking You can configure message text lines to tick or not tick Two types of message ticking exist e Character by character e Line by line Messages that tick character by character scroll off the characters of the message line one character at a time to the left with the additional characters scrolling
21. 2008 2009 2010 2011 YYYY MM DD a On 2008 06 01 p M a Off 2010 08 31 i Jun Aug 01 31 B6 1 B6 2 B6 3 Yearly 0ff ON OFF Monthl y Off YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD Pulse Off 2008 06 01 2010 08 31 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 157 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Example 6 Yearly mode off Monthly mode off Pulse selected On Time 2008 03 15 Off Time On March 15 2008 the timer output switches on for one cycle Because the timer does not have a monthly action or yearly action the timer output pulses only one time at the specified On Time 2008 2009 2010 2011 YYYY MM DD nA _ On 20080315 _ J Q Off tt tt a 15 B6 1 B6 2 B6 Jar Yearly 0ff ON OFF Mont hl y Of f YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD Pulse 0On 2008 03 15 LEE E LEK KK Example 7 Yearly mode on Monthly mode off Pulse off On Time 2008 12 15 Off Time 2010 01 07 On December 15 of 2008 and 2009 the timer output switches on and remains on until January 7 of the following year When the timer output turns off on January 7 2010 it does NOT turn on again the following December 15 YYYYMM DD On 2008 12 15 r j Q Off 2010 01 07 A B6 1 B6 24 B6 3 Yearly On ON OFF Monthl y Off YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD Pulse Off 2008 12 15 2010 01 07
22. Defining a specific analog output value To output a specific analog value at the two analog outputs 9 Move the gt cursor to Defined Press Aor V 10 Confirm Defined Press OK The display shows AQ1 00 00 AQ2 00 00 11 Enter a specific output value for each of the two analog outputs 12 To confirm your entry Press OK 3 6 12 Defining the type of analog outputs Analog outputs can be either 0 10V 0 20mA which is the default or 4 20mA To define the type of analog outputs follow these steps starting from the programming menu 1 Move the gt cursor to Edit Press Vor A 2 Select Edit Press OK 3 Move the gt cursor to AQ Press Vor A 4 Select AQ Press OK 5 Move the gt cursor to AQ type Press Vor A 6 Select AQ type Press OK IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display for example AQ1 default AQ2 4 20mA The defined type for each analog channel is shown To change the type continue as follows 7 Move to the AQ that you want to change Press lt or gt 8 Select either default 0 10V 0 20mA or 4 20mA Press Vor A 9 Confirm your selection Press OK IDEC SmartRelay Manual 95 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 6 13 Deleting the circuit program and password To delete a circuit program and the password if one is defined
23. En L Max 1000 222 222222 222 222 2222 Ax 500 r E EE EEE PEAS 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec Q 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec IDEC SmartRelay Manual 223 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 2 An analog value of 300 range 0 1000 as the value for Ax must be modulated to a digital signal string The user defined T periodic time parameter is 10 seconds At the digital output of the PWM function the digital signal string is 3 seconds high 7 seconds low 3 seconds high 7 seconds low and continues in that pattern as long as parameter En high en__ Max 1000 0 0 eens nen en enna nen en enna nee Ax 300 Min 0 2 0000 0 0 0ee000 5 ERE pay Mea PO cies Q 3sec 3sec Calculation rule Q 1 for Ax Min Max Min of time period T when Min lt Ax lt Max Q 0 for PT Ax Min Max Min of time period T Note Ax in this calculation refers to the actual value Ax as calculated using the Gain and Offset Seiting the Par Parameter The following illustration shows the view in programming mode that corresponds to the first example Bl 1 B1 2 Mi n 00000 pe B 00000 Max 01000 T 00 04s A 01 00 P 2 Use the lt and keys to navigate to the Min Max A B T and P parameters For each digit of a value use
24. IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display Contrast ee ee 8 To change the display contrast Press lt or gt 9 To confirm your entry Press OK To set the display contrast in programming mode If you want to set the display contrast in programming mode select Setup in the main menu then menu Contrast You can now set the display contrast as described earlier as of step 8 To set the back light choice in parameter assignment mode 1 Select parameter assignment mode see Chapter 5 1 2 On the parameter assignment menu select Set Press V or A 3 Confirm Set Press OK 4 On the Set menu select LCD Press V or A 5 Confirm LCD Press OK 6 Move the gt cursor to BackLight Press Aor V 7 Confirm BackLight Press OK 8 Move the gt cursor to Default or AlwaysOn Press Aor V The default is that the back light is not on To set the back light to always be on select the AlwaysOn choice To set the back light choice in programming mode If you want to set the backlight choice in programming mode select Setup in the main menu then menu LCD You can now set the back light choice as described earlier as of step 6 Note The backlight lifetime of the Text Display is 20 000 hours 242 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartR
25. M08D2R2 DC M08C2R2 AC M08C2R2 AC Signal status 0 lt 5VAC lt 5VDC lt 40 VAC lt 30 VDC Input current lt 1 0 mA lt 1 0 mA lt 0 03 mA lt 0 03 mA Signal status 1 gt 12VAC gt 12VDC gt 79V AC gt 79VDC Input current gt 2 5mA gt 2 5mA gt 0 08 mA gt 0 08 mA 1 1 0 mA Version 1 to 5 specifications 2 8 V DC Version 1 to 5 specifications 3 1 0 mA Version 1 to 4 specifications 4 8 V DC Version 1 to 4 specifications 5 1 5 mA Version 1 to 4 specifications Note The digital inputs of FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC are divided into two groups each consisting of four inputs Within the same group all inputs must be operated on the same phase Different phases are only possible between the groups Example 11 to 14 on phase L1 I5 to 18 on phase L2 Inputs within the FL1B MO08C2R2 may not be connected to different phases IDEC SmartRelay Manual 35 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring Sensor connections Connecting glow lamps and 2 wire proximity switches Bero to FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC or FL1B M08C2R2 AC The figure below shows how you connect a switch with a glow lamp to IDEC SmartRelay The current that flows through the glow lamp allows IDEC SmartRelay to detect a 1 signal even though the switch contact is not closed If however you use a switch the glow lamp of which is fitted with a power supply
26. lies within the typical range of this sensor IDEC SmartRelay always converts the electrical signals at the analog input into digital values from O to 1000 A voltage of 0 to 10 V at input Al is transformed internally into a range of values from 0 to 1000 An input voltage exceeding 10 V is shown as internal value 1000 Because you cannot always process the range of values from 0 to 1000 as predetermined by IDEC SmartRelay you can multiply the digital values by a gain factor and then shift the zero of the range of values offset This allows you to output an analog value to the IDEC SmartRelay display which is proportional to the actual process variable Parameter Minimum Maximum Input voltage in V 0 gt 10 Internal value 0 1000 Gain 10 00 10 00 Offset 10000 10000 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 125 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Mathematical rule Actual value Ax internal value at input Ax gain offset Gain and offset calculation The gain and offset is calculated based on the relevant high and low values of the function Example 1 The available thermocouples have the following technical data 30 to 70 C 0 to 10 V DC i e 0 to 1000 in IDEC SmartRelay Actual value internal value gain offset thus 30 0 A B i e offset B 30 70 1000 A 30 i e gain A 0 1 Example 2
27. 1 Switch the IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode main menu gt Program Card IDEC SmartRelay opens the Setup main menu Start 2 Onthe main menu press A or W to move the gt cursor to Program Press OK gt Edit Clear Prg IDEC SmartRelay changes to Password the programming menu Msg Config 3 On the programming menu move the gt cursor to Clear Prg Press Aor Y 4 Confirm Clear Prg Press OK Clear Prg gt No Yes To cancel deletion of the circuit program leave the gt cursor at No and press OK If you are sure that you want to delete the circuit program from memory 5 Move the gt cursor to Yes Press Aor V 6 Press OK To prevent unintentional Password deletion of your circuit LZ M program you are prompted to enter your password provided you have assigned one 96 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 7 Enter your password 8 Press OK The circuit program and the password are deleted Note In case that you forget the password you can delete the circuit program and the password using WindLGC See the onlinehelp for WindLGC for more details For a base module with versions 3 and earlier you can delete the circuit program and the password by inputting a wrong password on Clear Prg m
28. 124 resumes operation until the time to go has expired for example To enable this response however the relevant functions must be set retentive Two options are available R The data is retained Current data is not retained default See the example on Page 90 SFs operating hours counter seven day time switch twelve month time switch and PI controller are always retentive Parameter protection In the parameter protection settings you can determine whether or not the parameters can be displayed and edited in IDEC SmartRelay parameter assignment mode Two options are available The parameter attribute permits read write access in parameter assignment mode default The parameter settings are read write protected in parameter assignment mode and can be edited only in programming mode See the example on Page 90 Note Parameter protection covers only the Set Param window If you embed variables of protected special functions in a message text the variables are still editable from the message text To protect these variables also activate the protection of the message text IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 3 6 Calculating the gain and offset of analog values A sensor is connected to the analog input and converts a process variable into an electrical signal This value of signal
29. Applications Components used e K1 contactor relay e K2 contactor relay S0 normally closed contact STOP pushbutton e 1 normally open contact START pushbutton e S2 normally open contact flow sensor e S3 normally open contact flow sensor e H1 signal lamp e H2 signal lamp Block diagram of the IDEC SmartRelay solution The block diagram of the air conditioning system with IDEC SmartRelay On Error Q1 Exhaust Off fan Exhaust fan Q1 amp Q2 Exhaust air Fresh air Exhaust fan flow sensor 13 fan Exhaust air flow sensor 13 Fresh air fan Fresh air flow sengor 278 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 3 2 Advantages of using IDEC SmartRelay The IDEC SmartRelay solution requires less switchgear That saves you installation time and space in the control cabinet You might even be able to use a smaller switching cabinet Additional IDEC SmartRelay options e The free output Q4 can be used as isolated signal contact for reporting faults or power failure e Itis possible to switch off of the fans by means of a sequential circuit These functions can be implemented without additional switchgear Block diagram of the extended IDEC SmartRelay solution The fans at Q1 and Q2 are switched on and off by means of the following circuit On L a 1 Exhaust Git a fan 30s amp Exhau
30. DM Al AO Inputs FL1E H12RCC Two groups vw AH FL1E B12RCC 11 14 and 124 Al8 FL1E H12RCA 15 18 FL1E B12RCA FL1E H12RCE 11 12 13 16 17 18 19 FL1E B12RCE Al3 Al4 AM 124 Alb FL1E H12SND Al2 Al8 Outputs Q1 Q4 Q5 none AQ1 Q16 AQ2 lo Logical 0 signals off hi Logical 1 signals on x An existing connection that is not used DM Digital module Al Analog input module AO Analog output module IDEC SmartRelay Manual 59 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 2 Blocks and block numbers This chapter shows you how to use IDEC SmartRelay elements to create complex circuits and how blocks and I O are interconnected In Chapter 3 3 you will learn how to transform a conventional circuit into an IDEC SmartRelay circuit program Blocks A block in IDEC SmartRelay represents a function that is used to convert input information into output information Previously you had to wire the individual elements in a control cabinet or terminal box When you create the circuit program you interconnect the blocks To do so simply select the connection you require from the Co menu The menu name Co is an abbreviation of the term Connector Logic operations The most elementary blocks are the logic operations AND lt OR I1 4 Inputs 11 and 2 are here connected to the 12 gt i OR blo
31. FL1E H12RCA Yes lay Base or 24V BG 8 4 z Yes Pure FL1E B12RCA DC FL1E H12RCE 12 24V 8 4 Yes 11 I2 4 Yes FL1E B12RCE DC 11 18 1718 8 4 FL1E H12SND 24V DC 11 18 11 12 4 Tr Yes I7 18 Expansion 12 24V R J f E Module FL1B M08B2R2 DC 4 4 FL1B MO8B1S2 24V DC 4 4 Tr 100 FL1B MO8C2R2 240V 4 4 AC DC FL1B M08D2R2 PAYAG 4 4 DC 12 24V FL1B J2B2 DC 2 FL1D K2B2 24V DC 2 0 10V FL1D K2BM2 24VDC E Text 24V AC Display FL1E RD1 DC Yes 12V DC AS Inter AS face FL1B CAS2 Interface Module Voltage IDEC SmartRelay Manual 333 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Type Numbers Cable and Accessories Table B Name Function Type Number WindLGC Exclusive Programming Software for IDEC SmartRelay FL9Y LP1CDW incl Hardware Software Manual PC Cable Down load Up load Cable FL1A PC1 USB PC cable Down load Up load Cable FL1E PC2 Memory cartridge FL1E PM4 Battery cartridge FL1E PB1 r FLIE PGI User s Manual FL1E User s Manual English FL9Y B1090 Mounting Clip 5 pieces FL1B PSP1PN05 Removal Tool Memory Cartridge Removal Tool MT 101 334 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Index Index A Als in Base Module 244 AM See Analog module Amplifier analog 1
32. Mechanical 10 Hz Ohmic load lamp load 2 Hz Inductive load 0 5 Hz Notice For fluorescent lamps with capacitors the technical data of fluorescent lamp ballasts must also be considered If the maximum allowed surge current is exceeded fluorescent lamps must be switched with appropriate contactor relays IDEC SmartRelay Manual 311 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data A 7 Technical data FL1B M08D2R2 Power supply FL1B M08D2R2 Input voltage 24 V AC DC Permissible range 20 4 26 4 V AC 20 4 28 8 V DC Reverse polarity protection not applicable for this module Permissible mains frequency 47 63 Hz Power consumption e 24V AC 120 146 mA e 24VDC 20 75 mA Voltage failure buffering typ 5 ms Power loss e 24V AC 2 4 4 3 VA e 24VDC 0 4 1 8W Backup of the real time clock at 25 C Accuracy of the real time clock Digital inputs Number 4 optional P action or N action Electrical isolation No High speed inputs not applicable for this module Input frequency e Normal input e max 4 Hz e High speed input e not applicable for this module Input voltage L Signal 0 lt 5 V AC DC e Signal 1 gt 12 V AC DC Input current at Signal 0 lt 1 0 mA Signal 1 gt 2 5mA Delay time at Otol typ 1 5 ms 1to0 typ 15 ms Line lengt
33. Use the lt and gt keys to navigate between the operand value operator and operation priority To change a value use the A and keys to scroll through value choices for each value Use the lt key to navigate from one screen to the previous screen when the cursor is on the V1 V4 line and the key to navigate to the next screen from the PR1 PR3 line Use the OK key to accept changes IDEC SmartRelay Manual 229 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 31 Analog math error detection Short description The analog math error detection block sets an output if an error has occurred in the referenced analog math function block Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay En Input En A change in the status from 0 to 1 at R input En Enable enables the analog E Q math error detection block Par Input R A signal at input R resets the output Parameter MathBN block number of an analog math instruction Err ZD Divide by 0 error OF Overflow error ZD OF Divide by 0 error OR Overflow error AutoRst Reset the output before the next execution of the analog math error function block Y yes N no OutputQ Q is set high if the error to detect occurred in the last execution referenced analog math function block Parameter MathBN The value for the MathBN parameter references be the block number of an already p
34. after the program start 4 To select Momentary pushbutton or Switch action Press Aor V B 3 3 The status is not retentive On Of f Switch function Start 0n lt Q is reset in the first cycle after the program start 206 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 5 To change to the start state Press lt or gt 6 To change the start state Press Aor V B 3 3 4 The status is not retentive On Of f Switch function Start Off lt 1 Q s reset in the init cycle after the program start 7 Confirm your entries with OK View in parameter assignment mode example Here you can set or reset the Switch parameter On Off When in RUN IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display B33 Swi tch Of f Let us assume you want to set Switch On 1 Change to the editing mode Confirm with OK the cursor is now positioned on Off 2 To change from Off to On Press Aor V 3 Confirm your entries with Press OK B33 i The momentary pushbutton switch Switch On is here switched on IDEC SmartRelay Manual 207 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 25 Shift register Short description You can use the shift register function to read the
35. blank AS Interface rated voltage 30V DC C1 24V AC DC Terminal type 2 non removable terminal Text Display FL1E RD Remote Display Version type 10 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Symbols Version with display unit is equipped with 8 inputs and 4 outputs Version without display unit is equipped with 8 inputs and 4 outputs The digital module is equipped with 4 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs m The analog module is equipped with 2 analog inputs or two analog E outputs according to the device type The communication module CM for example AS Interface is equipped with 4 virtual inputs and 4 virtual outputs ma The Text Display IDEC SmartRelay Manual 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Versions The following IDEC SmartRelay versions are available Symbol Designation Supply Inputs Outputs Properties voltage a FL1E H12RCE 12 24 V DC 8 digital 4 relays 10 A FL1E H12SND 24VDC 8digital 4 solidstate no clock 24V 0 3A FLIE H12RCA 24VAC 8digital 4 relays 24 V DC 10A FL1E H12RCC 100 240V 8 digital 4 relays AC DC 10A FL1E B12RCE 12 24 V DC 8 d
36. e 100 VDC 10 25mA 240 VDC 6 15mA Inrush current 0 46 A at 100 V DC 0 46 A at 100 V AC 0 92 A at 240 V DC 0 92 A at 240 VAC Voltage failure buffering e 100 V AC DC typ 10 ms 240 V AC DC typ 20 ms Power loss at e 100 V AC 2 8 4 6 VA 240 VAC 4 8 7 2VA e 100 VDC 1 1 2 9W 240VDC 1 4 3 6W Backup of the real time clock at 25 C typ 80 hours without battery cartridge typ 2 years with battery cartridge Accuracy of the real time clock typ 2 s day Digital inputs Number 8 Electrical isolation No High speed inputs not applicable for this module Input frequency e Normal input e High speed input e max 4 Hz e not applicable for this module Input voltage L1 Signal 0 Signal 1 Signal 0 e Signal 1 lt 40 VAC gt 79V AC lt 30 VDC gt 79V DC IDEC SmartRelay Manual 299 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data Input current at FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC Signal 0 lt 0 03 mA AC e Signal 1 gt 0 08 mA AC Signal 0 lt 0 03 mA DC e Signal 1 gt 0 12 mA DC Delay time at e Oto1 120 VAC typ 50 ms 240 V AC typ 30 ms 120 VDC typ 25 ms 240 VDC typ 15 ms e 1to0 120 VAC typ 65 ms 240 V AC typ 105 ms 120 VDC typ 95 ms 240 V DC typ 125 ms Line length unshielded 100 m Digital outputs Number 4 Output type Relay outp
37. 0 1 2 3 Output Q Q is set or reset depending on the difference Ax Ay and the set thresholds Al Gain and offset parameters For more information on the gain and offset parameters refer to Chapter 4 3 6 Parameters On and Off Al8 0 10 V corresponds with 0 1000 internal value The on threshold On and the off threshold Off can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 4 4 27 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number IDEC SmartRelay Manual 177 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameter p number of decimals Does not apply to Ax Ay On Off and A values displayed in a message text Does not apply to the comparison of on and off values The compare function ignores the decimal point Timing diagram Ax Ay Ax
38. A circuit program with password protection is no longer protected after the correct password has been entered that is you can then edit the program and remove the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge Note When you create the circuit program for a memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge you need to assign a password to be able to edit it at a later time see Chapter 3 6 5 Correlation between the password and the protective function Password Protection Editing Copying Deleting gt Yes Yes Yes Yes with Yes with Yes Yes password password Yes No No Yes Yes with Yes with Yes with Yes Yes password password password Phone 800 894 0412 Fax IDEC SmartRelay Manual 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card Assigning a security function To assign a circuit program and copy protection function to the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge open the programming mode and select Card 1 Switch IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode ESC gt Stop 2 Select the Card command Press Aor V 3 To apply Card Press OK 4 Move the gt cursor to CopyProtect Press Aor V 5 To apply CopyProtect Press OK IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display gt No Yes CopyProtect No The current protection setting is s
39. Ack Of lt 1 Status of acknowledgment On To configure the message destination and tick type programming mode 1 From the Priority and Acknowledgement screen form press gt to access the Message Destination screen form B33 2 MsgDest lt Message Destination IDEC BM SmartRelay base module Text Display or both 2 Press to position the cursor on the BM line 3 Press A or W to toggle through the three choices for message destination BM TD or BM amp TD 4 From the Message Destination screen form press to access the Tick Type screen form 200 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions B33 3 TickT ype ick Type Character by Character Ch by Ch or Line by Line Ln by Ch by Ch Ln 5 If your message text has lines that tick press to position the cursor on the Ch by Ch line and then press A or Y to select either Ch by Ch or Ln by Ln for the TickType 6 From the Tick T ype screen press to enable or disable ticking for each line of the message text IDEC SmartRelay displays the following screen form B33 4 1 No a Tick settings A No Line does not tick 2 N 0 Yes Line does tick 7 Press A or W to choose between No and Yes to define whether line 1 ticks 8 Press to move the cursor to the seco
40. Approx 190 g on a 35 mm profile rail 4 module widths or wall mounting IDEC SmartRelay expansion modules Dimensions WxHxD 36 x 90 x 53 mm Approx 90 g on a 35 mm profile rail Weight 2 module widths Installation or wall mounting Text Display 128 2 x 86 x 38 7 mm Approx 220g Bracket mounting Climatic conditions Ambient temperature Low temperature to IEC Horizontal installation 60068 2 1 0 55 C Vertical installation High temperature to IEC 0 55 C 60068 2 2 Storage shipping 40 C 70 C Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 From 10 to 95 no condensation Air pressure 795 1080 hPa Pollutants IEC 60068 2 42 IEC 60068 2 43 SO 10 cm m 10 days H S 1 cm m 10 days Ambient mechanical conditions Degree of protection IP 20 for IDEC SmartRelay base module front panel IP 65 UL type 4x 12 for Text Display front panel Vibrations IEC 60068 2 6 5 8 4 Hz constant amplitude 3 5 mm 8 4 150 Hz constant acceleration 1 g Shock IEC 60068 2 27 18 shocks half sine wave 15g 11 ms Free fall packaged IEC 60068 2 32 0 3m IDEC SmartRelay Manual 297 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data Criterion Tested in accordance with Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Values
41. FL1B J2B2 318 FL1B M08B1S2 307 FL1B M08B2R2 314 FL1B M08C2R2 302 FL1B M08D2R2 312 FL1D K2B2 319 FL1D K2BM2 319 FL1E B12RCA 309 IDEC SmartRelay Manual FL1E B12RCC 299 FL1E B12RCE 314 FL1E H12RCA 309 FL1E H12RCC 299 FL1E H12RCE 314 FL1E H12SND 305 general 297 Text Display 320 Text Display 3 Backlight lifetime 320 display 13 Display lifetime 320 function keys 3 installing 30 menus 331 power supply 34 power up screen 3 voltage 13 Ticker 198 Time response 122 Timebase 89 122 132 Timer 1 accuracy 123 Timing inaccuracy 123 Transistor outputs 44 Trigger Analog differential trigger 174 Analog trigger 171 Frequency trigger 168 Twelve month time switch 155 U Underflow error 230 Unused connectors 59 64 Unused inputs 64 Up down counter 161 Upward compatibility 249 URL v USB 261 341 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Index V Verification 91 Voltage levels 113 Voltage supply connecting Circuit protection 34 W WindLGC 260 Wintertime 97 Wire ferrules 32 without display PC IDEC SmartRelay mode 261 reading current data 327 X XOR 120 Z Zero division error 230 Zero offset 125 342 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
42. For a message that ticks line by line the actual tick time is ten times the configured tick time For messages that tick character by character the actual tick time is the configured tick time e CharSets The primary and secondary character sets from which you can configure message texts CharSett1 and CharSet2 can be any of the supported character sets for IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay Manual 193 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Character Common Supports Internet Reference Set in IDEC Name Languages SmartRelay ISO8859 1 Latin 1 English http en wikipedia org German Italian wiki ISO IEC_8859 1 Spanish partly Dutch partly ISO8859 5 Cyrillic Russian http en wikipedia org wiki ISO IEC_8859 5 ISO8859 9 Latin 5 Turkish http en wikipedia org wiki ISO IEC_8859 9 1SO8859 16 Latin 10 French http en wikipedia org wiki ISO IEC_8859 16 GB 2312 Chinese Chinese http en wikipedia org wiki GB2312 Shift JIS Japanese Japanese http en wikipedia org wiki Shift_JIS e Current Character Set which character set is selected for the display of message texts Note Message texts supported by IDEC SmartRelay FL1D will display on the Text Dispaly only when the following conditions are met CharSet1 is selected and set to ISO8859 1 Current Character Set CurrCharSet is set to CharSet1
43. IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 29 Pulse Width Modulator PWM Short description The Pulse Width Modulator PWM instruction modulates the analog input value Ax to a pulsed digital output signal The pulse width is proportional to the analog value Ax Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input Ax Analog signal to be modulated to a pulsed digital output signal Parameter Min Range of values 20 000 Max Range of values 20 000 A Gain Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 T Periodic time over which the digital output is modulated p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output Q Q is set or reset for the proporition of each time period according to the proportion of the standardized value Ax to the analog value range PEs Parameter T Note the defaults of the T parameters listed in Chapter 4 3 2 The periodic time T can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual value of the following functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down coun
44. Power supply External input signal to base module and expansion modules i 10sec FB process The initialization period of base module I O signal of base module is reflected in the user program 1 Version 7 or earlier 2 d p A a expansion modules 1 During the initialization of expansion modules I O signal of expansion modules is reflected Version 8 or later in the user program 1 1 Output signal of base module and expansion modules are reflected 1 scan time after each input signal has been re flected 2 During the initialization period of expansion I O modules inputs and outputs are off In addition the length of initializa tion period varies with expansion I O modules and I O re sponse depends on the expansion I O modules For further information see our Internet address 52 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring Before power off After power on No Program c gt gt press Esc Press ESC No program in AN rogram memory gt Card j A Setup with program P Mo 09 00 with stored program from Mo e eee ae a IDEC SmartRelay I 3 gt 0 123456789 0 123456789 ean 1 0123436783 1 0123456789
45. R g see page 148 Far Seven day time switch Nol TN see Page 150 No2 i No3 Q Par Twelve month time switch see Page 155 Counter R T Up down counter REM Dir 4 7 see Page 161 Far R int Operating hours counter REM Ral ip 2 see page 164 Par Frequency trigger Fre Par IL a see Page 168 Analog Analog trigger x A a see page 171 Par JJL Analog differential trigger Ax fA see page 174 Par LP eS Analog comparator e AA Y B see Page 177 Far IDEC SmartRelay Manual 129 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions View in IDEC SmartRelay Name of the special function Rem Analog value monitoring En 1 TA An Qi see Page 182 Par J A Analog amplifier see Page 185 Analog multiplexer see Page 210 Pulse Width Modulator PWM see Page 222 Analog math see Page 225 Analog ramp control see Page 212 PI controller REM see Page 216 Latching relay REM see Page 190 Current impulse relay REM see Page 191 Message texts see Page 193 130 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions View in IDEC SmartRelay Name of the special function Rem Softkey REM En S Par F FQ see Page 205 ip Shift register REM rg
46. RUN and STOP are indicated by an LED on the front hood e Red LED Power On STOP e Green LED Power On RUN The red LED is lit after Power On and in all IDEC SmartRelay states other than RUN The green LED is lit when IDEC SmartRelay is in RUN mode 326 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay without display Reading current data WindLGC see Chapter 7 provides an online test for reading the current data of all functions while the system is in RUN If your IDEC SmartRelay without display holds a protected memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge you cannot read the current data unless you enter the correct password for the circuit program The circuit program is otherwise deleted from IDEC SmartRelay memory when you remove the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge to connect the PC cable See Chapter 6 1 Deleting the circuit program Use WindLGC to delete the circuit program and password if a password exists IDEC SmartRelay Manual 327 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay without display 328 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay menu structure D 1 IDEC SmartRelay base module Menu overview No Program zee ognan ESC J a Setup P Start
47. SmartRelay interprets this parallel circuit as an OR K1 logic because S1 OR S2 E1 switches on the output Translated into an IDEC SmartRelay circuit program this means Relay K1 is at output Q1 is controlled by means of an OR block IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Circuit program S1 is connected to the 11 and S2 to the I2 input connector of the OR block The corresponding layout of the circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay m m x a Q1 Wiring The corresponding wiring L1 sit N X ___f S1 switches input 11 while S2 switches input 12 The load is connected to the relay Q1 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 71 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 6 3 72 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Circuit program input Let us now write the circuit program starting at the output and working towards the input IDEC SmartRelay initially shows the output The first IDEC SmartRelay output Ql You will see an underscore below the Q in Q1 which is the cursor The cursor indicates your current position in the circuit program You can move the cursor by pressing the A Vv lt and
48. Start push button 2 CLOSED STOP push 13 button 14 Gate is open x CLOSE push Q1 button STOP pushbutton 13 Safety bar l6 Gate is closed 15 The OPEN or CLOSE pushbuttons initiate the gate motion provided it is not already moving in the other direction The gate is stopped by means of the STOP pushbutton or the relevant limit switch A safety bar furthermore interrupts the closing motion of the gate IDEC SmartRelay Manual 283 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 4 3 Extended IDEC SmartRelay solution Our extended control circuit is to open the gate automatically when the safety bar is actuated Q2 STOP x Q1 pushbutton 13 Open Gate is open 14 Q3 Signal lamp THe Q1 TL 2s Inv lo CLOSE pushbutton 2 Il T aL Q2 STOP pushbutton 5s Close Safety bar 16 Gate is closed 15 284 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 5 Centralized control and monitoring of several factory doors 1 2 WW TiN Door N We iS Door II Master 1 2 h m fes Often a company s premises can be entered at several locations Not all of the gates can always be monitored locally by personnel They must therefore be able to be monitored and operated by the porter who sits in a central gateh
49. Vv gt Cani gt m4 v gt CopyPmtect gt E Card Copying the circuit program from IDEC Smart Felay to the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge Chapter 6 3 Copying the program from the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge to IDEC Smart Felay Chapter 6 4 Setup menu ESC gt Stop gt Setup m tting the program copy protection Chapter 6 1 gt Cek pst Chak __ Stting the time date Chapter 5 2 1 v gt SW Time Stting the summertime wintertime Chapter 3 7 14 v gt Sync Synchronizing the times of IDEC Smart Pelay base module Chapter 3 6 15 SIED b gt Contas Setting the display contrast Chapter 5 2 2 gt BackLight Setting the display back light setting Chapter 5 2 2 v gt Menu Iang Setting the menu language Chapter 5 2 3 gt BM AINUM Setting the number of base module Als Chapter 5 2 4 for select modules Start Menu RUN Everythng bay max 50 message texts Sm artRehy AV 2 a a a J i e e E e Qe AL Mo 0990 p 0 123456789 p 0 123456789 p gt 1 00000 gt 2008 05 26 1 0123456789 10123456 2 01000 4 a 2 01234 ry a 3 00253 Date time Inputs Outputs Analog inputs AL AL AQ M ESC C 4 00010 gt 7 00000 gt 1 00000 p gt 0 123456789
50. You can connect an output to several inputs but not the same input to several outputs Within the same program path you may not connect an output to an upstream input For such internal recursions you should interconnect memory markers or outputs IDEC SmartRelay Manual Programming IDEC SmartRelay Rule 3 Cursor and cursor movement The following applies when you edit a circuit program e You can move the cursor when it appears in the form of an underscore Press lt gt V or A to move the cursor in the circuit program Press OK to change to Select connector block Press ESC to exit programming mode e You select a connector block when the cursor appears as a solid square Press W or A to select a connector or a block Confirm with OK Press ESC to return to the previous step Rule 4 Planning e Before you start to create a circuit program you should either first create a design on paper or program IDEC SmartRelay directly using WindLGC e IDEC SmartRelay can only save complete and faultless circuit programs IDEC SmartRelay Manual 67 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 5 Overview of IDEC SmartRelay menus Programming mode Main Menu Programming menu gt Program gt Edit Card Eee Clear Prg Setup Password Start Msg Config Transfer menu gt Card E IDEC Card gt m4
51. and off times at the Cam parameters The seven day time switch sets the output at a certain on time if this is not already set The seven day time switch resets the output at a certain off time if you configured an off time or at the end of the cycle if you specified a pulse output You will cause a conflict if the on and off times you set for the seven day time switch are identical though set on different cams In this case cam3 takes priority over cam2 whereas cam2 takes priority over cami The switching state of the seven day time switch is determined by the status of all three cams IDEC SmartRelay Manual 151 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameter assignment screen form View of the parameter assignment screen form for example for Cam1 and the Pulse setting Block B1 Cam 1 See Showing hiding parameters Parameter protection mode on B1 page 90 D MTWIFSS lt 7 Weekdays daily On 06 30 lt Ontme 06 30 h Of f 08 00 lt ofttime 08 00 h Pulse form Bl 4 Pul se Of f lt Pulse setting On or Off Days of the week The suffix of D Day has the following meaning Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Uppercase letters indicate a specific day of the week A indicates no selection for the day of the week On Off times Any time between 00
52. s es 33 2 3 2 Connecting the Text Display power SUPDIY 0 cseeeeeeeeeteteeee 34 2 3 3 Connecting IDEC SmartRelay inputs ccceeccecteeeeeeteteeeeees 35 2 3 4 Connecting OUTPUTS ceceecceeceeeeceeeeseeceeeeeeecaeeeteeetaeeeteeetetataesees 44 2 3 5 Connecting the AS interface DUS cceecceseeesteeeeeteteeeeeeeteeees 49 2 4 Putting into operation s sussesesesenenununununnnnnnunenununununnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnn 51 2 4 1 Switching on the IDEC SmartRelay Power On 51 2 4 2 Operating States sninn neiet ha aeiio 54 3 Programming IDEC SmartRelay sseeeeee 57 Beli FH COMMECUONS nn E a a a asai Dedania 58 3 2 Blocks and block numbers s ssssssssususunununnnnnnununununununnnnununennnunnnnnnen 60 3 3 From circuit diagram to IDEC SmartRelay program 0 008 63 3 4 The four golden rules for operating IDEC SmartRelay 66 IDEC SmartRelay Manual vii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 3 5 Overview of IDEC SmartRelay Menus csssseeeeeeeeeneieees 68 3 6 Writing and starting the Circuit program sceseseseeseseeeeseteeen 69 3 6 1 Selecting programming MOE ceceececeeteeeeeeeeeeteteeeseeeeeeteeeees 69 3 6 2 The first Circuit PrOQrarm eeceeessseeseseeseeceeeeceeesseetsneesseeeeseeetaees 70 3 6 3 Circuit program INPUT eee ceeeceseeceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeetetaneneeates 72 3 6 4 Assigning a circuit program NAM
53. supply voltage and chassis ground series resistor with 24 V DC On the FL1E H12RCA B12RCA P1 and P2 are indicated in place of L and M respectively FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC ZN 38 L3 m T7 The inputs of these devices are ET y arranged in 2 groups each N consisting of 4 inputs Different phases are only possible between 12 blocks but not within the blocks m Q y Om S Qo Gz Warning Current safety regulations VDE 0110 and IEC 61131 2 as well as cULus do not permit the connection of different phases to an AC input group I1 to 14 or I5 to 18 or to the inputs of a digital module IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring FL1B J2B2 eE PE terminal for connecting earth and shielding the analog measuring cable Earth Cable shielding DIN rail GeO Lr 0 10V Current Reference 0 20mA Current M Current measurement Voltage measurement The illustration above shows an example of four wire current measurement and two wire voltage measurement Connecting a two wire sensor to the FL1B J2B2 Wire up the two wire sensor s connecting wires as follows 1 Connect the sensor s output to connection
54. the following circuit program corresponds with the circuit program in Chapter 3 7 7 ee EEEE Q B1 I1 gt d Proceed as follows 1 Switch IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode as a reminder refer to page 66 2 To select Edit Press A or V 3 To confirm Edit Press OK If required enter your password and confirm with OK 4 To select Edit Prg Press Aor V 5 To confirm Edit Prg Press OK 6 To move the cursor to the input of Q1 that is to B2 press lt B2 Q1 7 Confirm with OK 8 Now set the connector x at output Q1 instead of block B2 To do so Select the Co list Press Aor Y Accept the Co list Press OK Select x Press Aor Apply x Press OK Result Block B2 is deleted because it is no longer used in the circuit This includes all blocks connected to B2 In this example block B1 also IDEC SmartRelay Manual 93 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 6 10 Correcting programming errors 3 6 11 94 Programming errors can be corrected easily in IDEC SmartRelay e Provided editing mode is not yet closed you can revert by one step by pressing ESC e If you have already configured all inputs simply reconfigure the faulty input 1 Move the cursor to the faulty position 2 Change to editing mode Press OK 3 Enter the correct input circuit You
55. versions are not programmed directly on the device Instead the circuit program is downloaded to the device from WindLGC or from memory cartridges or combined memory battery cartridges from other IDEC SmartRelay devices IDEC SmartRelay versions without a display cannot write data to memory cartridges or combined memory battery cartridges See Chapters 6 7 and Appendix C Asmall example in the first part of this chapter introduces the operating principles of IDEC SmartRelay You will learn the meaning of two basic terms namely the connector and the block e As the next step you will create a circuit program based on a simple conventional circuit e Lastly you will enter this program directly in IDEC SmartRelay It will take you only a few pages of this manual to store your first executable circuit program in the IDEC SmartRelay unit With suitable hardware switches etc you will then be able to carry out initial tests IDEC SmartRelay Manual 57 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 1 Connectors IDEC SmartRelay is equipped with inputs and outputs Example of a configuration with several modules Inputs L M L M 9 hone M _ M _ M SPO OPAMPMOPOAPOOPD OGOGOAGOO SOOOGO OGO9OOO Tim rm fm A E RUN STOP RUN STOP RUN STOP o aooo o 22002 eoooe 42022 2 29 9 2 990
56. 00 h and 23 59 h is possible You can also configure the on time to be a pulse signal The timer block will be activated at the specified time for one cycle and then the output is reset means No on off times set NnnNASHE 152 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Setting the seven day time switch To set the on off times 1 Move the cursor to one of the Cam parameters of the timer e g No1 2 Press OK IDEC SmartRelay opens the Cam parameter assignment screen form The cursor is positioned on the weekday 3 Press A and W to select one or several days of the week 4 Press gt to move the cursor to the first position of the on time 5 Set the on time Modify the value at the respective position using the keys A and V Move to the cursor to the various positions using the keys lt and Pm At the first position you can only select the value means No on off times set 6 Press to move the cursor to the first position of the off time 7 Set the off time in same way as in step 5 8 Confirm your entries with OK The cursor is now positioned on the No2 parameter Cam2 and you can configure a further cam Note For information on timer accuracy refer to the technical data and to Chapter 4 3 2 Seven day time switch Example The output of the seven day time switch s
57. 3 On the right side of the IDEC SmartRelay base module IDEC SmartRelay expansion module remove the connector cap 4 Place the digital module onto the DIN rail on the right hand side of the IDEC SmartRelay base module 5 Slide the digital module towards the left until it contacts the IDEC SmartRelay base module 26 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 6 Using a screwdriver push the interlock to the left In its end position the slide interlock engages in IDEC SmartRelay base module TN Ii I2 13 I4 eT 1 Merrer N ll aT TR m j p SS tot i Hl ji EF LC m I i a bi tT f a 19 68 G8 OF GE lescces ESR SESH SESE SES Repeat steps 3 through 6 to mount further expansion modules Note The expansion interface on the last expansion module must be covered 27 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring Removal To remove IDEC SmartRelay ern if you have installed only one IDEC SmartRelay base module Part A 1 Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the slide interlock and move the latch downward 2 Swing the IDEC SmartRelay base module
58. 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card Compatibility Old memory cartridges in newer IDEC SmartRelay modules to earlier versions FL1C and FL1D devices Data written to the memory cartridge in the FL1D can be read in all FL1E But data written to the memory cartridge in the FL1C cannot be read by the FL1E When the memory cartridge is read by the FL1E the original data in the FL1E is deleted Data cannot be written from the FL1E to the memory cartridge to earlier versions FL1A to FL1B devices A memory cartridge that contains data written in earlier versions FL1A FL1B devices cannot be used in IDEC SmartRelay devices of the FL1C and later generations When the IDEC SmartRelay system detects such an old memory cartridge the message Unknown Card Press ESC is output to the display Vice versa a FL1C or later memory cartridge cannot be used in IDEC SmartRelay devices of the FL1A FL1B family Compatibility New memory battery or combined memory battery cartridges in older IDEC SmartRelay modules The FL1E memory cartridge can be used in FL1C or FL1D devices but cannot be used in FL1A FL1B devices Data written to the FL1E memory cartridge in the FL1C cannot be read by the FL1E When the memory cartridge is read by the FL1E the original data in the FL1E is deleted A FL1E Memory cartridge or FL1E Memory Battery cartridg
59. Battery cartridge IDEC SmartRelay can retain the clock time for up to two years To backup the real time clock for more than 80 hours insert a battery cartridge or a combined memory battery cartridge to the base module Sample configuration The output of an IDEC SmartRelay is to be set annually on March 1 reset on April 4 set again on July 7 and reset again on November 19 You need to configure two twelve month time switches with corresponding on times Then logically link the outputs by means of an OR block Bl 1 Twel th B2 1 Twel h Yearly On ee Yearly On ae mon ime switch 1 time switch 2 Mont hl y Off On time Mar 1 Mont hl y Off On time Jul 7 Pulse Off offtime Apr4 Pulse Off otf time Nov 19 Bl 2 B2 2 ON ON YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD 2000 03 01 2000 07 07 B1 3 B2 3 OFF OFF YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD 2099 04 04 2099 11 19 Result POATE E E EEE On B1 B2 off March 1 July7 at 00 00 h at 00 00 h i April 4 November 19 at 00 00 h at 00 00 h 160 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 13 Up down counter Short description An input pulse increments or decrements an internal value depending on the parameter setting The output is set or reset when a configured threshold is reached The direction of count can be changed with a signal
60. Dir a see Page 208 Par Analog math error detection En 4 R Q see Page 230 Par E 4 4 1 On delay Short description The output is only set after a configurable on delay time has expired Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input Trg A signal at input Trg Trigger Trg Il Q triggers the on delay timer Par 4 IL Parameter T represents the time after which the output is switched on 0 to 1 transition of the output signal Retentivity no retentivity R the status is retentive Output Q Q is switched on when the set time T has expired provided Trg is still set IDEC SmartRelay Manual 131 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Paramete rT Note the defaults for parameter T in Chapter 4 3 2 The time for parameter T can also be preset based on the actual value of another already configured function You can use the actual values of the following functions Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 PI controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 Counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13
61. Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Functional Description The analog math function combines the four operands and three operators to form an equation The operator can be any one of the four standard operators or For each operator you must set a unique priority of High H Medium M or Low L The high operation will be performed first followed by the medium operation and then by the low operation You must have exactly one operation of each priority The operand values can reference another previously defined function to provide the value The analog math function rounds the result to the nearest integer value The number of operand values is fixed at four and the number of operators is fixed at 3 If you need to use fewer operands use constructions such as 0 or 1 to fill the remaining parameters You can also configure the behavior of the function when the Enable parameter En 0 The function block can either retain its last value or be set to 0 If the parameter Qen 0 0 then the function sets AQ to 0 when En 0 If the parameter Qen gt 0 1 then the function leaves AQ at its last value when En 0 Possible errors Zero division and overflow If the analog math function block execution results in zero division or overflow it sets internal bits that indicate the type of error that occurred You can program an analog ma
62. Mo 15 30 on the weekday YYYY MM DD 2008 05 26 8 Select the day of the week Press Aor Y 9 Move the cursor to the next position Press lt or gt 10 To change the value Press A or 11 To set the correct TOD repeat steps 9 and 10 12 To set the correct date repeat steps 9 and 10 13 To confirm your entries Press OK To set the TOD and the date in programming mode If you want to set the TOD and the date in programming mode select Setup in the main menu then menus Clock and Set Clock You can now set the weekday and the time as described earlier as of step 8 5 2 2 Setting the display contrast and backlight choice You can set the default value for the display contrast in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu LCD menu item e in programming mode by means of the setup menu LCD menu item To set the display contrast in parameter assignment mode 1 Select parameter assignment mode see Chapter 5 1 2 On the parameter assignment menu select Set Press Vor A 3 Confirm Set Press OK 4 On the Set menu select LCD Pres V or A 5 Confirm LCD Press OK 6 By default the cursor points to Contrast If not move the gt cursor to Contrast Press A or Y 7 Confirm Contrast Press OK IDEC SmartRelay Manual 241 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay
63. Off G_T Analog Analog trigger On Off A B Ax Analog differential trigger On A A B Ax Off Analog comparator On Off A B Ax Ay AA Analog value monitoring A A B Ax Aen Analog amplifier A B Ax Analog multiplexer V1 V2 V3 V4 AQ Analog ramp control L1 L2 MaxL StSp Rate A B AQ PI controller SP Mq KC TI Min Max A B PV AQ Analog math V1 V2 V3 V4 AQ PWM Pulse Width Modulator A B T Ax amplified Miscellaneous Latching relay Current impulse relay Message texts Softkey On Off Shift register IDEC SmartRelay Manual IDEC SmartRelay functions For timers a message text can also display the remaining time Remaining time refers to how much time of the parameter setting remains Bar graphs can be either horizontal or vertical representations of the current or actual value scaled between the minimum and maximum value For more information on configuring and displaying bar graphs in message texts refer to the WindLGC online help Editing message texts Only simple message texts can be edited from the IDEC SmartRelay base module Text messages created in WindLGC that make use of new features such as bar graphs I O status names and others can not be edited from the IDEC SmartRelay base module Also you cannot edit message texts from the IDEC SmartRelay base module that conta
64. On threshold Range of values 0000 9999 Off Off threshold Range of values 0000 9999 G_T Time interval or gate time during which the input pulses are measured Range of values 00 05 s 99 99 s Output Q Q is set and reset at the thresholds Parameter G_T The gate time G_T can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 e Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 e Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 e Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 e Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number 168 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Timing diagram Q l i Fre e emanate eee aS On 9 i Off 5 fa 9 Ge fa 8 7 fa 5 fa Input frequency Functional description The frequency trigger measures the signals at input Fre The pulses are recorded across a configurable time G_T Output Q is set and reset in accordance with the set thresholds See th
65. Short description When an on delay is set the output is reset when the configured time has expired Symbol in IDEC SmartRelay Trg JL_ ROT a Wiring Input Trg Par Description The off delay timer starts with a negative edge 1 to 0 transition at input Trg Trigger Input R A signal at input R resets the on delay time and the output Parameter The output switches off transitions from 1 to 0 when the delay time T expires Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q Qis set with a signal at input Trg It holds this state until T has expired Parameter T Note the parameter T defaults specified in Chapter 4 3 2 The time for parameter T can be based on the actual value of another already configured function You can use the actual value of the following functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 4 4 27 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number The timebase is configurable For information on valid timebase ranges and parameter pr
66. Technical data A 6 Technical data FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA Power supply FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA Input voltage 24 V AC DC Permissible range 20 4 26 4 V AC 20 4 28 8 V DC Reverse polarity protection not applicable for this module Permissible mains frequency 47 63 Hz Power consumption 24VAC 76 182 mA e 24VDC 40 100 mA Inrush current 2 28 A at 24 V DC 2 48 A at 24 V AC Voltage failure buffering typ 5 ms Power loss 24VAC 1 8 4 4 VA e 24VDC 1 0 2 4W Backup of the real time clock at 25 C typ 80 hours without battery cartridge typ 2 years with battery cartridge Accuracy of the real time clock typ 2 s day IDEC SmartRelay Manual 309 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA Digital inputs Number 8 optional P action or N action Electrical isolation No High speed inputs not applicable for this module Input frequency e Normal input max 4 Hz e High speed input not applicable for this module Input voltage L e Signal 0 lt 5 V AC DC e Signal 1 gt 12 V AC DC Input current at e Signal 0 lt 1 0 mA Signal 1 gt 2 5mA Delay time at Otol typ 1 5 ms 1to0 typ 15 ms Line length unshielded 100 m Analog inputs Number Range max Input voltag
67. The Text Display must be supplied with a voltage of 12 V DC or 24 V AC DC Note A power failure might cause an additional edge triggering signal at the special functions The stored data will be from the last uninterrupted cycle Connecting IDEC SmartRelay To connect IDEC SmartRelay to the power supply IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay with DC power supply with AC power supply L L1 M nt 556655600 666660 a AN lt Protection with safety fuse if To suppress surge voltages required recommended for install varistors MOV with an FL1E H12RCE 0 8A operating voltage at least 20 FL1E H12SND 2 0A above the rated voltage Note IDEC SmartRelay is a double insulated switchgear You do not need to connect an equipment grounding conductor IDEC SmartRelay Manual 33 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring Circuit protection with AC voltage To suppress voltage peaks on the power supply lines you can install a metal oxide varistor MOV Make sure the operating voltage of the varistor MOV used lies at least 20 above the rated voltage 2 3 2 Connecting the Text Display power supply The Text Display must be connected to an external power supply that supplies a voltage of 12 V DC or 24 V AC DC A power connector is included with the Text Display
68. U 0 10 V voltage measurement or to connection 0 20 mA current measurement of the FL1B J2B2 module 2 Connect the plus connector on the sensor to the 24 V supply voltage L 3 Connect the ground connection of the current output M on the right side of the sensor as shown in the figure above to the corresponding M input M1 or M2 on the FL1B J2B2 module IDEC SmartRelay Manual 39 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring Input Internal Circuit FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC Digital AC DC Input 390kQ 180kQ 270kQ 11 I8 Internal Circuit FL1B M08C2R2 Digital AC DC Input 390kQ 390kQ 270kQ Internal Circuit a 2 2 o Q AC 2 wire Sensor Note Bleeder resistance R4 calculation R4 must satisfy the following three conditions Maximum input OFF voltage 40V AC Condition 1 R4 Q 9 lt Maximum sensor leakage current A Sensor power voltage V Minimum sensor load current A The voltage drop across the load R4 must be less than 40V while the sensor is turned off Condition 2 R4 Q lt Sensor power voltage V 2 Condition 3 PR4 W Sensor powar voltage V jE x 3 3 recommended allowance R4 resistance 2 40 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring FL1E H12RCA
69. _ _ On 2000 03 15 a aa Mar Mar Mar 15 15 15 15 B6 1 B6 2 B6 3 Yearly On JON OFF Monthly Off YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD Pulse On 2000 03 15 2099 Example 3 Yearly mode on Monthly mode off Pulse off On Time 2008 06 01 Off Time 2010 08 31 On June 1 of 2008 2009 and 2010 the timer output switches on and remains on until August 31 2008 2009 2010 2011 YYYY MM DD 7 i yvr vO On 2008 06 01 Q Off 2010 08 31 1 Jun Aug Jun Aug Jun Aug m 3 o1 31 0 3 B6 1 B6 2 B6 3 Yearly On ON OFF Mont hl y Of f YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD Pulse Off 2008 06 01 2010 08 31 156 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Example 4 Yearly mode on Monthly mode off Pulse on On Time 2008 03 15 Off Time 2010 On March 15 of 2008 2009 and 2010 the timer output switches on for one cycle 2008 2009 2010 2011 YYYY MM DD enw oOo On 20080315 _ l E Q ai J aa e Aa Mor Mor 15 15 15 B6 1 B6 2 B6 3 Yearly On ON OFF Monthl y Of f YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD Pulse On 2008 03 15 2010 Example 5 Yearly mode off Monthly mode off Pulse off On Time 2008 06 01 Off Time 2008 08 31 On June 1 2008 the timer output switches on and remains on until August 31 2010
70. a Jl Switching response A latching relay represents a simple binary element The output value depends on the status at the inputs and on the previous output status The following table shows the logic once again S R Q Comment 0 0 x The status is retentive 0 1 0 Reset 1 0 1 Set 1 1 0 Reset takes priority over Set When retentivity is enabled the current status of the output signal is retained after a power failure 190 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 22 Current impulse relay Short description A short pulse at the input sets and resets the output Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Trg Input Trg You set and reset output Q with a 5 iat J signal at input Trg Trigger k Input S You set output Q with a signal at input Par S Input R You reset output Q with a signal at input R Parameter Selection RS R input priority or SR S input priority Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q Q is set with a signal at Trg and reset with the next signal at Trg if S and R 0 Timing diagram The bold printed section of Trg SUL fl fl the timing diagram is also 5 mE shown in the symbol for the rot ae current impulse relay ee EE Functional description Output Q changes it
71. additional modules Which display modules are available e IDEC SmartRelay Base with display e Text Display 2 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Features of the Text Display The Text Display is available with the FL1E series It provides an additional display that is wider than the Base module It has four function keys that you can program in your circuit program as inputs Like the IDEC SmartRelay Base module it has four cursor keys an ESC key and an OK key that you can also program in your circuit program and use for navigation on the Text Display You can create and download a power up screen for the Text Display from WindLGC This screen displays briefly when you initially power on the Text Display You can also upload the power up screen from the Text Display to WindLGC The menus for the Text Display are shown in Appendix section D 2 You configure the settings for the Text Display independently from the IDEC SmartRelay Base module The settings can be different Which communication modules are available e IDEC SmartRelay communication module CM AS interface which is described in more detail in a separate documentation The communication module has four virtual inputs and outputs and acts as an interface between an AS Interface system and an IDEC SmartRelay system The module enables four data bits to
72. analog inputs Al1 Al8 the analog memory markers AM1 AM6 the block number of a function with analog output or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 A Gain Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 On On threshold Range of values Off Off threshold Range of values 20 000 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 20 000 Symbol in IDEC Wiring SmartRelay Input Ax ax 7A p Par JIL a Parameter Output Q Q is set or reset by the Frequency triggers Alt Al8 0 10 V corresponds with 0 1000 internal value Gain and offset parameters Please note the information on gain and offset parameters in Chapter 4 3 6 Parameters On and Off The On and Off parameters can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 PI controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrw
73. appearance of this message on the IDEC SmartRelay Display or Text Display is the left half of the message as shown in this illustration X1 Xa Xa Xa Xs Ke Xr Xa Xo XoXn Xid X1 X Kis X16 Xi X18 X19 Kao X21 X22 X23 X After 1 second 10 x 0 1 second the message ticks to show the right half of the message as shown in this illustration X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 Xie X19 X2 X21X22 X23 X24 The screen display alternates between the two message halves every second You can configure each individual line of a message text to tick or not tick The character by character or line by line setting applies to all lines that you configure to tick IDEC SmartRelay Manual 199 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Input P configuration From the input P you configure the following characteristics of the message text e Priority e Acknowledgement e Message destination e Tick type and tick setting for each line To configure the priority and the acknowledgment programming mode means The parameters and B3 3 r 1 lt 4 T actual values in an active message Priorit y text can be edited 0004 Priority Ack 0Of f lt Status of the acknowledgment 1 Increase the priority to 1 Cursor on 0 A 2 Change to Ack Press gt 3 Enable Ack Press Aor V IDEC SmartRelay shows B33 1 Priority 001 Priority 1
74. available with the FL1D series The inputs of a connected analog module are numbered according to the already existing analog inputs See section 2 1 1 for example setups In programming mode when you select the input signal of a special function that takes an analog input IDEC SmartRelay offers the analog inputs Al1 Al8 Analog memory markers AM1 AM6 analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 and the block numbers of functions with analog outputs Outputs 1 Digital outputs Digital outputs are identified by the character Q The output numbers Q1 Q2 Q16 correspond with the numbers of the output connectors at the IDEC SmartRelay base module and with those of the expansion modules in their order of installation See the following figure 110 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions There are also 16 blank outputs available These are identified with an x and cannot be reused in a circuit program in contrast to memory markers for example The list shows all programmed blank outputs and one blank output which is not yet configured A blank output for example is useful for the special function Message texts see Chapter 4 4 23 if only the message text is of significance to a circuit program 2 Analog outputs Analog outputs are identified by the letters AQ Two analog outputs are available namely AQ1 and AQ2 An analog output
75. battery cartridge slide a screwdriver with a 3 mm blade into the slot on the upper surface of the card until it engages in the back then with the screwdriver engaged pull the card out with your hand gt BO8SScesas J SPRBSECESES 9 f y f _ A 7 ET 4 a N Tweet J Tery eA Is Inserting a memory cartridge battery cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge The entry of the memory cartridge battery cartridge and the combined memory battery cartridge slot is chamfered on its bottom right The edge of the cartridges are chamfered accordingly This encoding prevents you from inserting cartridges the wrong way Insert the memory cartridge battery cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge into the slot and push it in until it engages IDEC SmartRelay Manual 253 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card 6 3 Copying data from IDEC SmartRelay to the memory cartridge To copy the circuit program to the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge 1 Insert the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge into the slot 2 Switch IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode ESC gt Stop gt Program Card Setup Start IDEC SmartRelay main menu 3 The main menu opens To select the Card command Press A or V 4 Press OK The transfer menu opens gt
76. be transferred from the IDEC SmartRelay base module to the AS Interface system and vice versa IDEC SmartRelay Manual 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay It s your choice The various IDEC SmartRelay Base versions expansion modules Text Display and communication modules offer you a highly flexible and adaptive system to suit your specific tasks The IDEC SmartRelay system offers you many solutions such as for small domestic installations simple automation tasks and even complex engineering tasks involving its integration into a bus system e g communication module AS interface Note IDEC SmartRelay base module may only be equipped with expansion modules of the same voltage class Mechanical encoding pins in the housing prevent you from connecting devices of a different voltage class Exception The left hand interface of an analog module or communication module is galvanically isolated This type of expansion module can therefore be connected to devices of a different voltage class See also Chapter 2 1 A Text Display if used can be connected only to an FL1E IDEC SmartRelay base module Each IDEC SmartRelay base module supports the following connections for the creation of the circuit program regardless of the number of connected modules e Inputs 11 to 124 e Analog inputs Al1 to Al8 e Outputs Q1 to Q16 e Analog outputs AQ1 a
77. can only be connected with the analog input of a function an analog memory marker AM or an analog output connector The following figure shows an example IDEC SmartRelay configuration and the numbering of the inputs and outputs for the circuit program Inputs ae eee Outputs Analog inputs Analog outputs Memory Markers Memory Markers are identified by the letters M or AM These are virtual outputs which output the value of their inputs IDEC Smart Relay provides 27 digital memory markers M1 M27 and 6 analog memory markers AM1 AM6 Startup Marker Marker M8 is set in the first cycle of the user program and can thus be used in your circuit program as a startup marker This signal is automatically reset after the circuit program has completed its first cycle The M8 marker can be used in all further cycles for setting deletion and evaluation procedures in the same way as other markers IDEC SmartRelay Manual 111 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Backlight flags M25 and M26 The M25 flag controls the backlight of the IDEC SmartRelay Display The M26 flag controls the backlight of the Text Display Note The backlight lifetime of the Text Display is 20 000 hours Message text character set flag M27 The M27 flag selects between the two character sets that IDEC SmartRelay uses to display message texts State 0 corresponds to Charact
78. can only replace a block with a block that has exactly the same number of inputs However you can delete the old block and then insert a new one You can choose any new block Selecting analog output values for RUN STOP transition You can select the analog values that are output at the two analog outputs when IDEC SmartRelay changes from RUN mode to STOP mode In the programming menu 1 Move the gt cursor to Edit Press Vor A 2 Select Edit Press OK 3 Move the gt cursor to AQ Press V or A 4 Select AQ Press OK 5 Move the gt cursor to AQ in Stop Press Vor A 6 Select AQ in Stop Press OK IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display gt Defined Last AQ in Stop Last The first two rows show your choices The bottom row shows the current setting for the analog output channels The default setting is Last You can select either Defined or Last Last means that the analog output values are held at their last value and Defined means that the analog output values are set to specific values When IDEC SmartRelay changes from RUN mode to STOP mode the values of the analog outputs change as well depending on the setting 7 Select the desired output setting Press A or V 8 Confirm your entry Press OK IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay
79. circuit program from a compatible memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge to IDEC SmartRelay in one of two ways e Automatically during the startup of IDEC SmartRelay POWER ON e By means of the Card menu of IDEC SmartRelay Note If the program on the module cartridge is protected with a password the copied program in IDEC SmartRelay is also protected with the same password Automatic copying during the startup of IDEC SmartRelay Proceed as follows 1 Switch off the power supply to IDEC SmartRelay POWER OFF 2 Remove the slot cover 3 Insert the program module cartridge into the relevant slot 4 Switch on the power supply to IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay copies the program from the program module cartridge to IDEC SmartRelay If the memory cartridge is from an incompatible FL1A FL1B version IDEC SmartRelay displays this message Unknown Card Press ESC 256 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card When IDEC SmartRelay has finished copying it opens the main menu gt Program Card Setup Start Note Before you switch IDEC SmartRelay to RUN you must ensure that the system you are controlling with IDEC SmartRelay does not represent a source of hazard 1 Move the gt cursor to Start Press Aor Y 2 Press OK Copying by
80. confirm Off with OK Note Summertime wintertime conversion only functions when IDEC SmartRelay is operating in RUN or STOP status It does not func tion when IDEC SmartRelay is in buffered operation see Chapter 4 3 3 3 6 15 Synchronization Time synchronization between IDEC SmartRelay and the connected expansion modules can be enabled disabled in programming mode by means of the real time clock menu Clock menu item 1 Switch the IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode 2 You are now in the main menu and want to select Clock Press Aor Y 3 Confirm Clock Press OK 4 Move the gt cursor to Sync Press Aor Y 5 Apply Sync Press OK IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display gt On Off Sync Off The current setting of the automatic synchronization function is displayed in the bottom row The default setting is Off disabled IDEC SmartRelay Manual 101 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Enabling synchronization You want to enable synchronization 1 Move the gt cursor to On Press Aor V 2 Confirm On Press OK IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display gt On Off Sync On When synchronization is enabled IDEC SmartRelay transmits the time of day to the expansion modules once daily after each transition to RUN mode and when the TOD i
81. counter for ar the duration of the time to go MN Input En En is the monitoring input IDEC SmartRelay scans the on time of this input Input Ral A positive edge at input Ral Reset all resets the operating hours counter OT and the output and sets the time to go value MN tothe maintenance interval MI output Q 0 measured operating time OT 0 and the time to go of the maintenance interval MN MI Parameter MI Maintenance interval to be preset in units of hours and minutes Range of values 0000 9999 h 0 59 m OT The accumulated total operating time you can specify an offset in hours and minutes Range of values 00000 99999 h 0 59 m Q gt 0 Whenv R is selected Q 1 if MN 0 Q 0 ifR 1orRal 1 e When R En is selected Q 1 if MN 0 Q 0 if R 1 or Ral 1 or En 0 Output Q The output is set when the time to go MN 0 see timing diagramm The output is reset e When Q gt 0 R En if R 1 or Ral 1 or En 0 When Q gt 0 R if R 1 or Ral 1 MI Configured time interval MN Time to go OT Total time expired since the last hi signal at input Ral These values are always retentive 164 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameter MI The maintenance interval MI can be provided by the actual value of an
82. delay for the prewarning time Ti represents the length of the prewarning time period Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q_ A signal at Trg switches on output Q Depending on the length of the input at Trg the output is switched off again or switched on permanently or it is reset with a further signal at Trg 148 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameters T T T and Ty Note the defaults of the T parameters listed in Chapter 4 3 2 The off delay time T the permanent light time T the on delay prewarning time T and the prewarning time period Ty can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions ers comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 18 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 er ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number The timebase is configurable For information on valid ranges and parameter defaults refer to Chapte
83. direction Dir at runtime of the function The change is shown here for illustrative purposes only 3 As AQ is set to 0 by means of the input R PV changes This is based on the fact that PV increases which on account of Dir upwards causes AQ to drop Functional description If the input A M is set to 0 then the special function issues output AQ with the value that you set with parameter Mq If the input A M is set to 1 then automatic mode commences As an integral sum the value Mq is adopted the controller function begins the calculations IDEC SmartRelay Manual 219 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Note For further information on the controller basics please refer to the online help for WindLGC The updated value PV is used to calculate in the formulas Updated value PV PVegain offset e Ifthe updated value PV SP then the special function does not change the value of AQ e Dir upwards timing diagram numbers 1 and 3 If the updated value PV gt SP then the special function reduces the value of AQ If the updated value PV lt SP then the special function increases the value of AQ e Dir downwards timing diagram number 2 If the updated value PV gt SP then the special function increases the value of AQ If the updated value PV lt SP then the special function reduces the value of AQ With a
84. down counter Operating hours counter Twelve month time switch and analog watchdog instruction blocks e You can find information on compatibility of IDEC Smart Relay FL1E to previous devices at section 2 1 3 Additional support At our Internet address you can quickly and easily find answers to your queries about IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay Manual v Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Preface vi IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Contents Pref Ce isinisi testa cetecesitars tendec ca tate ts eats Socata ete ioaet de iii CONTIG aces kates eet hn Ss ceo ea ate vii 1 Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay 1 2 IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 17 2 1 Modular IDEC SmartRelay Setup s scsssssesseeeseeseeenenieeees 20 2 1 1 Maximum Sepon anann a a satin 20 2 1 2 Setup with different voltage classes ccececeeeceseseeeeeteeeeeeeeetees 22 21 7 Com at O r ered a EE ovale EE E Ea 24 2 2 Installing removing IDEC SmartRelay s sssssssnensesensnsennnninnnnennenas 25 2 2 1 DIN railMmouning neea dander hi A 26 Zee Walmonning aseessa oti 29 2 2 3 Mounting the Text Display ssseesesesersrsrererrsrrrerererererrrrrrerererenes 30 2 3 Wiring IDEC SmartRelay cscscssseeeeeseeesseeseeseeeeesneeseeenenanees 32 2 3 1 Connecting the power supply
85. e Signal 1 gt 0 08 mA AC Signal 0 lt 0 03 mA DC e Signal 1 gt 0 12 mA DC 302 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data FL1B M08C2R2 Delay time at e Oto1 120VAC typ 50 ms 240 V AC typ 30 ms 120 VDC typ 25 ms 240 VDC typ 15 ms e 1to0 120 VAC typ 65 ms 240 V AC typ 105 ms 120 VDC typ 95 ms 240 V DC typ 125 ms Line length unshielded 100 m Digital outputs Number 4 Output type Relay outputs Electrical isolation Yes Dielectric Strength between power input 2 500 V AC 1minute terminals and output terminals 500 V DC 1 minute In groups of 1 Control of a digital input Yes Continuous current hn max 5A per relay Surge current max 30 A Incandescent lamp load 25000 switching cycles at 230 240 V AC 1000 W 100 110 V AC 500 W Fluorescent tubes with ballast 25000 10 x 58 W at 230 240 V AC switching cycles Fluorescent tubes conventionally 1 x 58 W at 230 240 V AC compensated 25000 switching cycles Fluorescent tubes uncompensated 10 x58 W 25000 switching cycles at 230 240 V AC Short circuit proof cos 1 Power protection B16 600A Short circuit proof cos 0 5 to 0 7 Power protection B16 900A Derating none across the entire temperature range Parallel output circuits for power increase Not permitted Protection of output relay if desired
86. in one at a time from the right The time interval for the tick is specified by the TickTime message text setting Messages that tick line by line by line scroll one half of the message off the display to the left with the second half of the message scrolling in from the right The time interval for the tick is ten times the TickTime parameter The two halves of the message simply alternate on the IDEC SmartRelay Display or Text Display 198 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Example Tick Message Character by Character The following illustration shows a one line 24 character message text If you set this message to tick character by character with a tick interval of 0 1 seconds then the initial appearance of this message line on the IDEC SmartRelay Display or Text Display is as shown in this illustration Xr Xa Xa Xa X5 Xs Xr Xa Xo XioxXs Xid X X 4 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X2 X21 X22 X23 X24 After 0 1 second one character of the message line ticks The message appears as follows on the IDEC SmartRelay Display or Text Display X2 X3 X4 X5 Xs X7 Xs Xo Xo Xn X12 Xi gt 4X Example Tick Message Line by Line The following example uses the same message configuration as the previous example If you set this message to tick line by line with a tick interval of 0 1 seconds then the initial
87. is set 196 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Restriction A maximum of 50 message texts are available Functional description When IDEC SmartRelay is in RUN mode IDEC SmartRelay displays the message text that you have configured along with its parameter values upon a 0 to 1 transition of the signal at input En Based on your setting for the message destination the message text displays on the IDEC SmartRelay Display the Text Display or both If you use flag M27 in your circuit program then if M27 0 low then IDEC SmartRelay displays the message text only if it is from the primary character set Character Set 1 If M27 1 high then IDEC SmartRelay displays the message text only if is from the secondary character set Character Set 2 See the M27 flag description in section 4 1 If you have configured message ticking the message will tick on and off the display according to your specifications either a character at a time or a line at a time If acknowledgment is disabled Ack Off the message text is hidden when the status of the signal at input En changes from 1 to 0 If acknowledgment is enabled Ack On and the status of the signal at input En changes from 1 to 0 the message text is output until it is acknowledged with OK When En 1 you cannot acknowledge the message text
88. leave the shop After closing time the motion detector B2 continues to be used to open the door for 1 hour to allow the customers to leave the shop Actuating the motor for opening Output Q1 is set and opens the door when e The control switch at I5 is actuated the door is permanently open or The motion detectors indicate that somebody is approaching the door and The door has not yet fully opened limit switch at 14 Actuating the motor for closing Output Q2 is set to close the door when e The control switch at I6 is actuated the door is permanently closed or e The motion detectors indicate that there is nobody near the door and e The door has not yet fully closed limit switch at I3 Buzzer Connect the buzzer to output Q3 The buzzer gives a brief warning in this case 1 second when the door is closing Enter the following circuit at Q3 in the circuit program Q2 Close output Q3 Buzzer T 1s IDEC SmartRelay Manual 275 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 3 Air conditioning system 8 3 1 276 Requirements for an air conditioning system The air conditioning system supplies fresh air to a room or exhausts the contaminated air from a room Let us examine following example r Fresh air fan 4 d B Flow sensor Flow sensor Exhaust fan e The room is equipped with an exhaust fan and a fresh air fan Bo
89. message text p Core ee View in parameter assignment mode example B3 On 04000 lt onthreshold Of f 02000 lt Off threshold Ax 05000 lt a i axon View in the message text example 050 00 lt _ Ax when p 2 Q 1 Ax gt On IDEC SmartRelay Manual 173 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 17 Analog differential trigger Short description The output is set and reset depending on a configurable threshold and a differential value Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input Ax You apply the analog signal to be fax 7 7 a analyzed at input Ax Par J amp L Use the analog inputs Al1 Al8 the analog memory markers AM1 AM6 the block number of a function with analog output or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 Parameter A Gain Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 On On Off threshold Range of values 20 000 A Differential value for calculating the off parameter Range of values 20 000 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output Q Q is set or reset depending on the threshold and difference values Alt Al8 0 10 V corresponds with 0 1000 internal value Gain and offset parameters Please note the information on gain and offset parameters in Chapter 4 3 6 174 IDEC
90. module FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1E H12SND support up to four onboard inputs that can be used as either digital or analog inuts 0 10V Inputs I7 Al1 and I8 Al2 are available as analog inputs by default whether you use them or not Inputs 11 AI3 and 12 Al4 are optional analog inputs IDEC SmartRelay provides a menu where you can choose to use two analog inputs the default Al1 and Al2 or four Regardless of the settings inputs 11 and 12 can be used as digital inputs To use them as analog inputs AI3 and Al4 you must set the BM Al NUM to four Note that the number of configured analog inputs on the base module affects the subsequent numbering of analog inputs on attached expansion modules See the Maximum setup Page 20 topic To set the number of Als in parameter assignment mode 1 Select parameter assignment mode see Chapter 5 1 2 On the parameter assignment menu select Set Press Vor A 3 Confirm Set Press OK 4 On the Set menu select BM AI NUM Press Vor A 5 Confirm BM Al NUM Press OK 6 Move to 2Al or 4AI Press Aor Y 7 Confirm selection Press OK To set the number of Als in programming mode If you want to set the number of Als in programming mode select Setup in the main menu then menu BM AI NUM You can now set the number of Als as described earlier as of step 6 Note If you change the number of analog inputs IDEC SmartRelay re star
91. of S1 and S2 Inputs S1 S1 and S2 selectors for selecting the and S2 analog value to be issued S1 0 and S2 0 Value 1 is issued e S1 0andS2 1 Value 2 is issued e S1 1 and S2 0 Value 3 is issued e S1 1andS2 1 Value 4 is issued Parameter V1 V4 Analog values that will be issued Range of values 32768 32767 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output AQ This special function has an analog output This output can only be connected with the analog input of a function an analog memory marker or ap anaog output connector AQ1 Range of values for AQ 32768 32767 Parameters V1 V4 The analog values for the parameters V1 V4 can be derived from another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions Aber comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter e Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 e Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 e Analog multiplexer actual value AQ Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number For information on parameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 210 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cl
92. off the DIN rail a SR OR GE N Ne ae os EN aA eee if you have connected at least one expansion module to IDEC SmartRelay base module Part B 1 Using a screwdriver push the integrate slide interlock to the right 2 Slide the expansion module off towards the right 3 Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the slide interlock and lever it downward 4 Swing the expansion module off the profile rail Repeat steps 1 to 4 for all other expansion modules r A Note If you have connected more than one expansion module it is advisable to start removal with the last module at the right hand side Make sure the slide interlock of the module to be installed removed is not engaged in the next module 28 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 2 2 Wall mounting For wall mounting first slide the mounting slides on the rear side of the devices towards the outside You can now wall mount IDEC SmartRelay by means of two mounting slides and two M4 screws tightening torque 0 8 to 1 2 Nm t al Mounting slides o Dr
93. save a copy of your circuit program to the file system on your PC to make it directly available for modifications e It takes only a few key actions to download the circuit program to IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay Manual 259 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay software WindLGC WindLGC runs under Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP WindLGC is capable of client server operation and offers you a high degree of freedom and comfort for creating your circuit program WindLGC V6 2 This is the current version of WindLGC You will find all the functions and the functionality of the devices described in this manual in the version 6 2 Note Please note that the SmartRelay ladder programming is slightly different from PLC programming In the case of a PLC the output result on each line is reflected on the inputs within the same scan time However in the case of the IDEC SmartRelay all the inputs are processed first and then the outputs Thus the output results are not reflected on the inputs within the same scan time but rather they are reflected at the following scan ex Interlock is not activated in the sample program 1 below in which input terminals 11 and I2 are simultaneously turned on The interlock is activated in the sample program 2 below in which input terminals 11 and 12 are si
94. stop level If the Start Stop offset is 0 then the start stop level is Offset B Range of values 0 to 20 000 Rate Acceleration with which level 1 level 2 or Offset is reached Steps seconds are issued Range of values 1 to 10 000 A Gain Range of values 0 to 10 00 B Offset Range of values 10 000 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output AQ The output AQ is scaled using the formula Range of values for AQ 0 to 32767 Current Level Offset B Gain A Range of values 0 to 32767 Note When AQ is displayed in parameter mode or message mode it is displayed as an unscaled value engineering units current level IDEC SmartRelay Manual 213 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameters L1 L2 The analog values for the parameters L1 and L2 can be derived from another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 e Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 e Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 e Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 e Analog ramp control actual value AQ e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4
95. the door must close automatically with a short delay Motion detector Outside BIA CSSS pa ZZA 1 WLimit switch soll Limit switch closed open a7 inside Q1 Master switch B2 Motion detector SS The door is usually driven by a motor that is equipped with a slip coupling This prevents people from being squeezed in and injured The control system is connected to the mains via a master switch IDEC SmartRelay Manual 269 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 2 2 Conventional solution Auxiliary circuit L1 hd lire ol 2 K3 K3 B1 B2 K3 K3 s2 of S1 of K4 lt T B1 K2 K1 B2 K1 K2 K3 K4 X N e hd e eo Open Close Open door Waiting time When someone enters the detection range of one of the motion sensors B1 or B2 the door opening motion is initiated by setting K3 After the detection range of the two motion sensors has been cleared at least for a minimum time K4 enables the closing motion 8 2 3 Door control system with IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay can simplify this circuit considerably You only need to connect the motion sensors limit switches and the contactor relays to the IDEC SmartRelay 270 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Wiring of a door control system with FL1E H12R
96. the main menu select RUN to start IDEC SmartRelay 1 Return to the main menu Press ESC 2 Move the gt cursor to Start Press Aor Y 3 Confirm Start Press OK IDEC SmartRelay runs the circuit program and shows the following display Display field of IDEC SmartRelay in RUN mode Start screen Date and current time of Mo 09 00 day only for versions with real time 2008 05 26 clock This element flashes if the date and time are not set Or Start screen digital inputs see q Press p Chapter 5 2 5 0123456789 puts 110 to 119 01234 _ inputs 120 to 124 4 Press p Q Outputs Q1 to Q9 D orasaee al Outputs Q10 to Q16 I Inputs 11 to 19 0 123456789 1 2 q Press p AI 1 00000 S 2 01000 Analog inputs Al1 to AI3 3 00253 q Press p AI B Seer Analog inputs Al4 to Al6 6 00005 4 Press gt IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay AI 7 00000 _Analog inputs AI7 to Al8 8 00000 4 Press gt AQ 1 00000 2 01000 lt Analog outputs AQ1 to AQ2 4 Press gt M Memory Markers M1 to M9 0 123456789 4 1 0123456789 4 Memory Markers M10 to M19 2 01234567 T Memory Markers M20 to M27 4 Press gt ESC C A 4 gt 4 c
97. the timer turns off The maximum year is 2099 If you set the Yearly mode on the timer output switches on each year at the specified month and day of the on time and remains on until the specified month and day of the off time The on time specifies the initial year in which the timer is activated The off time defines the last year in which the timer turns off The maximum year is 2099 If you set Pulse output the timer output switches on at the specified on time for one cycle and then the timer output is reset Youcan choose to pulse a timer on a monthly or yearly basis or just a single time If you set none of the Monthly Yearly or Pulse modes on you can define a specific time period with the on time and off time It can span any time period that you choose For a process action that is to be switched on and off at multiple but irregular times during the year you can define multiple twelve month time switches with the outputs connected by an OR function block IDEC SmartRelay Manual 159 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Backup of the real time clock The internal real time clock of IDEC SmartRelay is buffered against power failure The buffering time is influenced by the ambient temperature and is typically 80 hours at an ambient temperature of 25 C If you are using the optional IDEC SmartRelay Battery cartridge or combined IDEC SmartRelay Memory
98. this response does not occur N E 3 X capacitor 2 5 kV 100 nF Take into account the quiescent current of any 2 wire proximity switches used The level of the quiescent current of some 2 wire proximity switches is high enough to trigger a logical 1 signal at the IDEC SmartRelay input You should therefore compare the quiescent current of the proximity switches with the technical data of inputs in Appendix A Remedy To suppress this response use an X capacitor rated at 100 nF and 2 5 kV In a destructive situation this type of capacitor safely disconnects You must choose the voltage level for which the capacitor is rated such that it is not destroyed in the case of overvoltage At 230 V AC the voltage between N and an input I n must not be greater than 40 V to guarantee a 0 signal You can connect approximately ten glow lamps to the capacitor Restrictions Signal status transitions 0 gt 1 1 0 After a 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 transition the signal must remain constant at the input at least for the duration of one program cycle so that IDEC SmartRelay can detect the new signal status The program execution time is determined by the size of the circuit program Appendix B contains a benchmark test routine that you can use to determine the current scan cycle time 36 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC Sma
99. to a frequency trigger and connecting the trigger input with an inverted marker B1 Output Qx or other marker Mx M AN Q Par JTL 7 B2 1 M1 Mi 2 Configure the frequency trigger as shown below A pulse is generated in each program cycle due to the inverted marker The trigger interval is set to 2 seconds B1 1 B1 2 On 1000 S G_T 02 00s Of f 0000 3 Now start the circuit program and switch IDEC SmartRelay to parameter assignment mode In this mode view the trigger parameters Bl On 1000 Of f 0000 fa total of measured pulses per fa 2130 timebase G_T 4 The reciprocal value of fa is equivalent to the IDEC SmartRelay execution time of the current circuit program in its memory 1 fa cycle time ins 322 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Determining the cycle time Explanation The inverted marker block changes its output signal at each program execution Thus one logic level high or low width is exactly equivalent to the length of one cycle Hence a period lasts 2 cycles The frequency trigger indicates the ratio of periods per 2 seconds which results in the ratio of cycles per second Edge transition of the inverted marker at each circuit program execution PAIN Cycle time 1 period 1 pulse 2 cycles Period IDEC SmartRel
100. value gt On View in the message text example Ax 00010 Ay 00020 180 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Reducing the input response of the analog comparator You can selectively delay the output of an analog comparator by means of the On delay and Off delay special functions With on delay output Q is only set if the pulse width of the triggering signal at input Trg analog comparator output is longer than the on delay time Using this method you will obtain a virtual hysteresis and reduce the input response to short signals Function block diagram All Analog comparator Bl Hy On delay B2 Off delay B3 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 181 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 19 Analog watchdog Short description This special function saves the process variable of an analog input to memory and sets the output when the output variable exceeds or drops below this stored value plus a configurable offset Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input En A positive edge 0 to 1 transition at En JA input En saves the analog value at Ax 44 A P input Ax Aen to memory and starts Pal 4 monitoring of the analog range Aen Ao to Aen Ay Input Ax You apply the analog sign
101. value of an input and to shift its bits left or right The output value corresponds with the configured shift register bit The shifting direction can be changed at a special input Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay In Input In Input read at the start of the function Trg yh a Input Trg A positive edge 0 to 1 transition at lig input Trg Trigger starts the special function 1 to 0 transitions are irrelevant Input Dir The signal at input Dir determines the shifting direction for the shift register bits S1 S8 Dir 0 Shift up S1 gt gt S8 Dir 1 Shift down S8 gt gt S1 Parameter Shift register bit that determines the value at output Q Possible settings S1 S8 Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q The output value corresponds with the configured shift register bit Functional description The function reads the value at input In with a positive edge 0 to 1 transition at input Trg Trigger This value is applied to shift register bit S1 or S8 depending on the shifting direction e Shift up The value at input In is set at S1 the previous value at S1 is shifted to S2 the previous value at S2 is shifted to S3 etc Shift down The value at input In is set at S8 the previous value at S8 is shifted to S7 the previous value at S7 is shifted to S6 etc Output Q returns the value of the configured shift register bit
102. you do not do this the system does not detect the expansion module when you start up the IDEC SmartRelay base module Note After power up the FL1E performs initialization After completing initialization the FL1E is ready to start to run During initialization a sandglass is displayed on the CPU module with display or the LED is lit red on the CPU module without display Initialization time regardless of expansion module When a memory cartridge or a combined memory battery cartridge is installed Max 10 sec When a cartridge is not installed or when a battery cartridge is installed Max 9 sec The initialization time depends on the program size IDEC SmartRelay Manual 51 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring Notes for Using Expansion I O Modules of Version 7 or earlier When using 3 or more expansion I O modules including those of the versions listed below immediately after power up it takes a specific period of time for the base module to accept input signals from the expansion I O modules Until the output terminals on the expansion I O module are actu ally turned on or off Expansion I O Modules FL1B MO8C2Ra2 Version 1 to 7 FL1B M08B1S2 Version 1 to 7 FL1B MO8B2R2 Version 1 to 7 FL1B MO8D2R2 Version 1 to 7 FL1B J2B2 Version 1 to 7 FL1D K2B2 Version 1 For identifying the version see page 5
103. 00 gt 02 00 UK Last Sunday in March Last Sunday in October 60 Min 01 00 gt 02 00 02 00 gt 01 00 US1 First Sunday in April Last Sunday in October 60 Min 02 00 gt 03 00 02 00 gt 01 00 US2 Second Sunday in First Sunday in 60 Min April 02 00 gt 03 00 November 02 00 gt 01 00 AUS Last Sunday in Last Sunday in March 60 Min October 02 00 gt 03 00 03 00 gt 02 00 AUS First Sunday in Last Sunday in March 60 Min TAS October 02 00 gt 03 00 03 00 gt 02 00 NZ First Sunday in Third Sunday in March 60 Min October 02 00 gt 03 00 03 00 gt 02 00 Customized month and Customized month and User day 02 00 gt 02 00 day Time zone defined Time zone difference difference 03 00 gt 03 00 resolution in Time zone difference minutes Note You can specify a time zone difference A between 0 and 180 minutes Let us assume you want to enable European summertime wintertime conversion 4 Move the gt cursor to EU 5 Confirm EU IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display Press Aor Y Press OK gt On Off S W Time On EU IDEC SmartRelay indicates that European S W Time conversion is enabled IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 99 Programming IDEC SmartRelay User defined parameters If none of the parameters conversions apply to your country you
104. 000 09 32 1 aa 1972 1a82 11 Q12 Outputs Analog inputs Each input is identified by the letter plus a number When you look at IDEC SmartRelay from the front you can see the input terminals at the top Only analog modules FL1B J2B2 have the inputs at the bottom Each output is identified by the letter Q plus a number FL1D K2B2 FL1D K2BM2 AQ plus number In the figure you can see the output terminals at the bottom Note IDEC SmartRelay can recognize read and switch the I O of all expansion modules regardless of their type The I Os are presented in the installation order of the modules The following I Os and marker blocks are available for creating your circuit program 11 to 124 Al1 to Al8 Q1 to Q16 AQ1 and AQ 2 M1 to M27 and AM1 to AM6 Also available are the shift register bits S1 to S8 4 cursor keys C A C gt C W and C lt four function keys on the Text Display F1 F2 F3 and F4 as well as 16 blank outputs X1 to X16 See Chapter 4 1 for more details The following applies to inputs 11 12 17 and 18 of FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1E H12SND versions If you use 11 12 I7 or 18 in the circuit program this input signal is digital If you use Als Al4 Al1 or Al2 the input signal is analog The numbering of the analog inputs is significant Al1 and Al2 corresponded to I7 and 18 on the FL1D module With the addition of two new analog inputs for the FL1E series these modul
105. 05 lt Current value of the time T or T 4 4 11 Seven day time switch Short description The output is controlled by means of a configurable on off date The function supports any combination of weekdays You select the active weekdays by hiding the inactive days 150 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Note Because the FL1E H12SND does not have a real time clock the seven day time switch function is not available for this version Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Nel Cam Atthe Cam parameters you set the No ai LS parameters on and off times of the seven day Ned A F 1 2 and 3 time switch for each Cam switch Par Here you also configure the days and the time of day Par You specify whether the timer pulses on for one cycle when activated and then reset The pulse setting applies to all three cams Output Q Q is set when the configured cam is actuated Timing diagram three examples Cam 1 121 ol d ned 1 3 1 3 Tne 2 ie ee eG Monday Wednesday Friday Sunday Tuesday Thursday Saturday Cam 1 Daily 06 30 h to 8 00 h Cam 2 Tuesday 03 10 h to 04 15h Cam 3 Saturday and Sunday 16 30 h to 23 10 h Functional description Each seven day time switch has three cams you can use to configure a time hysteresis You specify the on
106. 1 0 75 18 Al0 75 8GY TGN TC 1 25 11T BT1 25 10 1 1 25 18 Al1 5 8BK BT2 9 1 2 0 16 Al2 5 8BU BT2 9 1 NH11 Recommended CRIMPFOX ZA 3 NHT NH32 crimping tool NH61 NH65 For 2 cable connection Cross section Phoenix Contact mm AWG Ferrule type No 0 3 22 Al TWIN2X0 5 8WH 0 5 20 Al TWIN2X0 5 8WH 0 75 18 Al TWIN2X0 75 8GY 1 25 18 Al TWIN2X1 5 8BK Recommended CRIMPFOX ZA 3 crimping tool Note Always cover the terminals after you have completed the installation To protect IDEC SmartRelay adequately from impermissible contact to live parts comply with local standards 32 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay Manual IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 3 1 Connecting the power supply IDEC SmartRelays FL1E 12RCC FL1B MO08C2R2 are suitable for nominal line voltages of 100 V AC DC and 240 V AC DC IDEC SmartRelays FL1E 12RCA FL1B M08D2R2 are suitable for a supply voltage of 24 V AC DC IDEC SmartRelays FL1E H12SND FL1B M08B1S2 are suitable for a supply voltage of 24 V DC IDEC SmartRelays FL1E 12RCE FL1B M08B2R2 are suitable for a supply voltage of 12 V AC DC or 24 V AC DC Note the information on connection in the product information document shipped with your device and the technical specifications in Appendix A relating to permissible voltage tolerances line frequency and current consumption
107. 139 44 6 Edge triggered interval time delay relay 140 4 4 7 Asynchronous pulse Generator ceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteseteeeeeenees 142 4 4 8 Random gemeratr eccsesesesecsessessseesseseseeessnseseineeseeeeeeeeaees 144 4 4 9 Stairwell Light Switch 0 ccececceeeeeeeeteeecseeceeeeeeeesaeeeteeetseeeeees 146 4 4 10 Dual fUnCtion SWitCH oo eee eeneeecteeeceeeeceeeeceeeaeeeseetaeetaeeeenees 148 4 4 11 Seven day time SWICK cece ceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeetetataseeeass 150 4 4 12 Twelve month time switch occ e ences eneeeceeeteneeenetsenetaeeetaees 155 4 4 13 Up down Counter norice a i 161 4 4 14 Operating hours COUNTED ceeceeeeceeeteeeeseeceeeeteseteeeteeetaeeeeeass 164 44 15 Frequency trigger sacasigacsivy annline aniviey een ladlie aah 168 44 16 Analog trigger ac AAtnnd a eal a a as 171 4 4 17 Analog differential trigger cc eeseseecseeeeeeecteeesneeeeneeesneeeenees 174 4 4 18 Analog comparator oo ee eect eeeeeeeceeeeeneeeteeeeeeesetetaeeetaeeesieteeaees 177 4 4 19 Analog Watchdog eeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeneceeeeeceeecaeeesaeeeeneeeeaeeeenees 182 4 4 20 Analog amplie resni aeaa p 185 4 4 21 Latching tilay nnes ivieddheed 190 4 4 22 Current impulse relay cecccecceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeteeass 191 44 23 Messagetexts enina a iaa 193 4 4 24 SOPRKCY oo ccecteccceeseeeeeceeseseseeeeecaeaeseeesateeeeesseesieeetaeaeeeeeesaeaseees 205 4 425 Shift registers az crdad sivas oi tinea inna 208 4 4 26 Analog Multipl
108. 158 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Example 8 Yearly mode on Monthly mode on On Time 2008 01 Off Time 2010 05 Starting in 2008 on the first day of each month the timer output switches on and switches off on the fifth day of the month The timer continues in this pattern through the last month of 2010 Jan Feb Mar Apr YYYY MMDD n On 2008 01 f H n M Q Off 2010 05 it 1 i 15 15 15 15 B6 1 B6 2 B6 3 Yearly 0n ON OFF Mont hl y On YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD Pulse Off 2008 01 2010 05 Functional description The twelve month time switch sets and resets the output at specific on and off dates Sets and resets are executed at 00 00 If your application requires a different time use a seven day time switch together with a twelve month time switch in your circuit program The on time specifies when the timer is activated The off time specifies when the output is reset again For the on and off times note the order of the fields The first field defines the year the second the month and the third the day If you set the Monthly mode on the timer output switches on each month at the specified day of the on time and remains on until the specified day of the off time The on time specifies the initial year in which the timer is activated The off time defines the last year in which
109. 2 2 AND with Edge Detection Symbol in IDEC SmartRelay far 4 The output of an edge triggered AND is only 1 if all inputs are 1 and if at least one input was low in the previous cycle At an unused block input x x 1 Timing diagram for the AND with Edge Detection 4 2 3 NAND not AND Parallel circuit with multiple normally Symbol in IDEC closed contacts in the circuit diagram SmartRelay 1 he 7 4 The output of the NAND is only 0 if the status at all inputs is 1 i e the contacts are closed At an unused block input x x 1 116 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions NAND function logic table 1 2 3 4 Q 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 4 2 4 NAND with Edge Detection Symbol in IDEC SmartRelay The output status of the NAND with Edge Detection is only 1 if at least one input is 0 and if all inputs were 1 in the previous cycle At an unused block input x x 1 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 117 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Timing diagram for the NAND with Edge Detection
110. 3 Press to move the cursor to the B of the shown block and then press W to select the required block number 4 Press to move the cursor to the block s timebase and press W to select the required timebase B12 R T 8B006 m IDEC SmartRelay Manual 133 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions The view in parameter assignment mode example B12 T 04 10h Ta 02 00h Timing diagram Trg l current time or B12 T B006m Ta 02 00h The bold section of the timing diagram is also a L Par Ta expir shown in the on delay icon Functional description The time T is triggered with a 0 to 1 transition at input Trg T is the current IDEC SmartRelay time If the status of input Trg is 1 at least for the duration of the configured time T the output is set to 1 on expiration of this time the output follows the input with on delay The time is reset when the status at input Trg returns to 0 before the time T has expired The output is reset to 0 when the signal at input Trg is 0 If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure 134 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 2 Off delay
111. 36 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay 5 1 3 Modifying parameters You first select the parameter you want to edit see Chapter 5 1 2 You change the value of the parameter in the same way as you did in programming mode 1 Move the cursor to the point at which you want to make the change Press lt or gt 2 To change this value Press Aor V 3 To apply the value OK B9 ial Change Press A or V T 810 005 zl Move Press lt or gt Ta 06 00s Done OK Note When changing the time parameters when the system is in RUN you can also change the timebase s seconds m minutes h hours This does not apply if the time parameter represents the result of another function for an example see Chapter 4 4 1 In this case you can neither change the value nor the timebase The current time is reset to zero when you change the timebase Current value of a time T View of a time T in parameter assignment mode B9 T 80 005 Configured time T Ta 06 005 current time Ta You can change the configured time T Current timer value View of a timer cam in parameter assignment mode Bl 1 D M W F On 09 00 Of f 10 00 You can change the on off times and the day IDEC SmartRelay Manual 237 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info cl
112. 4 13 Select the required function by the block number For information on parameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Parameter p number of decimals Applies only to the AQ L1 L2 MaxL StSp and Rate values displayed in a message text Timing diagram for AQ Level 1 StSp B B 214 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Functional description If the input En is set then the function sets the current level to StSp Offset B for 100 ms Then depending on the connection of Sel the function runs from the level StSp Offset B to either level 1 or level 2 at the acceleration set in Rate If the input St is set the function runs to a level of StSp Offset B at the acceleration set in Rate Then the function holds the level at StSp Offset B for 100 ms After 100 ms the level is set to Offset B The scaled value output AQ is 0 If the input St is set the function can only be restarted after the inputs St and En have been reset If input Sel has been changed depending on the connection of Sel the function runs from the current target level to the new target level at the rate that is specified If the input En is reset the function immediately sets the current level to Offset B The current level is updated every 100 ms Note the r
113. 4 3 5 and the example on Page 90 Parameters are for example e The delay times of a timer relay e The switching times cams of a timer switch e Counter thresholds e The monitoring time for hour counters e The trigger thresholds Each one of the parameters is identified by its block number Bx and the shortname of the parameter Examples T is a configurable time e MI is a configurable time interval Note WindLGC also allows you to assign names to blocks for more in formation refer to Chapter 7 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 235 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay 5 1 2 Selecting the parameters To select a parameter 1 On the parameter assignment menu select Set Param Press V or A Stop gt Set Param Set Prg Name 2 Confirm with OK IDEC SmartRelay shows the first parameter If no parameter can be set you can press ESC to return to the parameter assignment menu Block number B9 lt Display number for functions T 60 00 with several displays T S The value set at parameter T Time Ta 06 00s lt The current time in IDEC SmartRelay No parameters for editing No Param Press ESC to return to the arameter assignment menu Press ESC i 3 Now select the desired parameter Press or A or V 4 Select the parameter you want to edit and press OK 2
114. 4 4 27 Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number Parameter p number of decimals Applies only to the Aen Ax A and A values displayed in a message text Timing diagram En Aen Ay Aen Aen A Ax Q Functional description A Oto 1 transition at input En saves the value of the signal at the analog input Ax This saved process variable is referred to as Aen Both the analog actual values Ax and Aen are multiplied by the value at parameter A gain and parameter B offset is then added to the product Axegain offset Actual value Aen when input En changes from 0 to 1 or Axegain offset Actual value Ax Output Q is set when the signal at input En 1 and if the actual value at input Ax is out of range of Aen Av to Aen A Output Q is reset when the actual value at input Ax lies within the range of Aen Avs to Aen Ay or when the signal at input En changes to lo IDEC SmartRelay Manual 183 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Setting the Par parameter The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the used sensors to the respective application View in programming mode
115. 8 Analog 2 analog 59 digital 2 59 operating state 55 F Flag blocks 111 FM 14 Four golden rules 66 Frequency trigger 168 Function blocks 60 Function keys 3 Functions 109 G Gain 125 GB 2312 194 GF 114 Golden rules 66 Guidelines 17 H Hiding 90 high speed counting 37 Hysteresis 181 l IDEC SmartRelay connecting to PC 261 IDEC SmartRelay Manual guidelines 17 identifying 9 Installing 25 memory and battery cartridges 247 menus 68 329 operating states 54 removing 25 software 259 structure of 5 switching on 51 versions 12 without display 325 Inputs 110 Analog inputs 37 110 connection 35 Cursor keys 58 112 Digital Inputs 110 Groups 35 inverting 114 128 unused 64 inputs High speed inputs 37 Inserting 87 Installation guidelines 17 Installing Text Display 30 Interlock 28 Internet address v Interval time delay relay Pulse output 139 Inverter 120 ISO8859 1 194 IS08859 16 194 ISO8859 5 194 ISO8859 9 194 L Language menu 243 337 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Index Latching relay 190 LCD lifetime Text Display 320 LED 326 Levels 113 List BF 109 BN 109 Co 109 110 GF 114 SF 109 128 Ln by Ln ticking 199 Logic module 1 Logical inputs 121 Math error analog 230 Memory areas 103 free 108 limitation 103 requirements 105 Memory cartridge 247 Card gt IDEC SmartRelay 258 CopyProtect 251 IDEC SmartRelay
116. 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Symbol in IDEC SmartRelay Wiring Parameter SP KC Th Dir Ma Min Max Description Set value assignment Range of values 10 000 to 20 000 Gain Range of values 00 00 to 99 99 Integral time Range of values 00 01 to 99 59 m Action direction of the controller Range of values Or Value from AQ with manual mode Range of values 0 to 1000 Minimum value for PV Range of values 10 000 to 20 000 Maximum value for PV Range of values 10 000 to 20 000 Gain Range of values 10 00 Offset Range of values 10 000 Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output AQ This special function has an analog output manipulated variable This output can only be connected with the analog input of a function an analog memory marker or an analog output connector AQ1 AQ2 Range of values for AQ 0 1000 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 217 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameters SP and Mq The set value SP and the value for Mq can be provided by another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Anal
117. 85 Analog comparator 177 values 125 Analog amplifier 185 Analog differential trigger 174 Analog math 225 Analog math error detection 230 Analog module 2 11 Analog multiplexer 210 Analog output type 95 Analog output values 94 Analog outputs 46 186 Analog ramp control 212 Analog trigger 171 Analog value monitoring 182 Analog watchdog 182 AND 115 Applications 263 AQ in Stop 94 AQ type 95 AS interface 3 AS interface bus communication failure 55 communication states 55 networking 49 Asynchronous pulse generator 142 B Backlight 241 Backlight flags 112 Backlight lifetime IDEC SmartRelay Manual Text Display 320 Basic functions 114 AND 115 with edge 116 NAND 116 with edge 117 NOR 119 NOT 120 OR 118 XOR 120 Basics on special functions 121 BF 109 blank outputs 111 Block 60 deleting 92 block groups 93 inserting 87 number 60 assigning 61 BM Al NUM 244 BN 109 C Cap 26 Card See Program module card CE label 14 Certification 14 Ch by Ch ticking 199 Character set flag 112 Character sets 193 Chinese character set 195 Circuit diagram 63 Circuit program input 72 circuit program 103 deleting 96 Circuit program name 335 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Index assigning 77 Circuit program size 103 Circuit programs archiving 247 reproduce 247 send by mail 248 Closing the programming mode 91 CM See Communications module Co 109 110 Combin
118. 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Dual function switch with IDEC SmartRelay Switch I1 JL Ty Ty T L Q1 Lights Output Q1 is set for the duration of a preset time Ty with a pulse signal at input 11 The permanent lighting function is enabled by keeping the momentary switch pressed for a specified time T_ 8 1 4 Special features and expansion options Other options for increasing comfort or saving energy are for example e A flashing function that indicates that the light is about to be switched off automatically e You can integrate various central functions Central off Central on panic button Control of all lamps or individual circuits by means of a daylight control switch Controlling by means of an integrated timer e g permanent lighting only until 24 00 h disabled at specific times Automatically switching off the permanent lighting on expiration of a preset time e g after 3 hours 268 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 2 Automatic door You often find automatic door control systems at the entrance to supermarkets public buildings banks hospitals etc 8 2 1 Requirements of an automatic door When a person approaches the door it must open automatically e The door must remain open until the doorway is cleared e When the doorway is cleared
119. 9 1 character set To enter text from another language you must enter the text in WindLGC Note that the number of characters per line of message text can be greater than the number of character positions on the IDEC SmartRelay Display Press OK to confirm your changes and press ESC to exit the editing mode 204 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 24 Softkey Short description This special function has the effect of a mechanical pushbutton or switch Symbol in IDEC SmartRelay En Par aia Q Wiring Input En Description Output Q is set with a 0 to 1 transition of the signal at input En Enable and if Switch On was confirmed in parameter assignment mode Parameter Programming mode Selecting the function for pushbutton action for the duration of one cycle or for switching action Start On or off state initialized at the first start of the program if retentivity is disabled Retentivity Noretentivity R The status is retentive Parameter assignment mode RUN mode Switch Switches the momentary pushbutton switch on or off Output Q Switches on if En 1 and Switch On was confirmed with OK Factory setting The default parameter setting is switching action Timing diagram En Switch Q
120. AAEE E ihe nin wd ea aes 118 42 6 NOR not OR eieiei amarar rae iaeiei aa aeaea reai r 119 4 2 7 XOR exclusive OR 0 seceecceseceeeecteeeeeeeeeeeeeeneecaeaseeeesasaeseeeeseeaes 120 4 2 8 NOT Negation Inverter c ccccceeeeeeeeeseseeceeeeeeecteeeeeteeeeeeaes 120 4 3 Special functions esccecscseetseeeeeeseseseeesaeeeeeeesaneeseseeanensetesaneeees 121 4 3 1 Designation Of the iNQUtS 0 ce eeceeeeceteeteeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeneees 121 4 3 2 TME FOSPOMSEC nese seeeecececceceececeetenseeecaececnesecsecessesesaneceanecnenetees 122 viii IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 3 3 Backup of the real time clock 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteesenetaeeetaees 123 ASA REEN oea a alarendsiag A T tines ipanddans 123 4 3 5 Parameter protection e eseessssresrerersrersrererrererriririrrerenrnrernrererns 124 4 3 6 Calculating the gain and offset of analog values eee 125 4 4 Special functions list SF csssscsesseseseseeeeeeeesseesseeseneneeeeaees 128 444 On delay cance A ieiawceonnniaa a i a 131 4 4 2 Off delay ones ceeeececcecteteeeceeseeeeeeeecaesecaeecaeaeeesetateetenetasseateeeesatasiees 135 443 On Off delay ie c asiienaheiaanhee ah enh aia iat 136 4 4 4 Retentive On delay eeeescesescesesceseseeseeeeseeseeeseneseneenneeeaees 138 44 5 Interval time delay relay Pulse output ee eeeeeeeecteeeeteeeeneesees
121. Ay Q 1 1 _ for Ax Ay gt 200 if On Off 200 Functional description The function fetches the analog values from the inputs Ax and Ay Ax and Ay are each multiplied by the value of the A gain parameter and the value at parameter B offset is then added to the relevant product i e Axegain offset actual value Ax or Ayegain offset actual value Ay The function forms the difference A between the actual values Ax Ay Output Q is set or reset depending on difference of the actual values Ax Ay and the set thresholds See the calculation rule below Calculation rule e Ifthe On threshold gt Off threshold then Q 1 if actual value Ax actual value Ay gt On Q 0 if actual value Ax actual value Ay lt Off e Ifthe On threshold lt Off threshold then Q 1 if On lt actual value Ax actual value Ay lt Off 178 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Setting the Par parameter The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application View in programming mode B 3 1 Parameter protection mode On 00000 oOn threshold Off 400000 Offthreshold Press gt B3 2 A 00 00 lt Gain B 00000 ofiset p 0 Decimals in the message text Example In a he
122. C SmartRelay Manual 65 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 4 The four golden rules for operating IDEC SmartRelay Rule 1 Changing the operating mode You create the circuit program in programming mode After power is on and when the display shows No Program Press ESC press the ESC key to select programming mode Timer and parameter values of an existing circuit program can be edited both in parameter assignment mode and in programming mode During parameter assignment IDEC SmartRelay is in RUN mode that is it continues executing the circuit program see Chapter 5 To work in programming mode you need to terminate the circuit program by calling the Stop command Select the Start command on the main menu to set RUN mode When the system is in RUN you can return to parameter assignment mode by pressing the ESC key When parameter assignment mode is open and you want to return to programming mode select the Stop command from the parameter assignment menu and confirm Stop Prg prompt with Yes To do so move the cursor to Yes and confirm with OK For more details on operating modes refer to Appendix D Rule 2 Outputs and inputs 66 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Always create your circuit program by working from the output to the input
123. CA FL1E B12RCA and FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC IDEC SmartRelay base module 4 digital modules 4 analog modules and 1 analog output module example n 12 13 16 17 18 E 113 116 117 120 21 124 All Al2 AIS Al4 AIS AIG AI7 Al8 IDEC Snart Felay FLIBMos FLIBMo8 F1BM08 FLIBMOs RBB ALiBwee F1BJ2B2 base module Q1 4 5 Q13 Q16 20 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring With any setup you can plug in an analog output module which has the maximum of two analog outputs For FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1E H12SND modules you can configure whether the module uses two or four of the four possible analog inputs Al inputs are numbered consecutively depending on how many you configure the base module to use If you configure two inputs they are numbered Al1 and Al2 and correspond to the I7 and 18 input terminals Subsequent Al expansions modules would begin numbering at AI3 If you configure four inputs they are numbered Al1 Al2 Al3 and Al4 and correspond to 17 18 11 and I2 in that order Subsequent Al expansions modules would begin numbering at Al5 See sections 4 1 and 5 2 4 High speed optimal communication performance For optimal and high speed communication performance between IDEC SmartRelay base module and the various modules we recommend that you install the digital modules firs
124. CC L1 K1 K2 e Open Close Components used e Ki contactor relay open e K2 contactor relay close e 1 normally closed contact limit switch close e S2 normally closed contact limit switch open e B1 normally open contact infrared motion sensor outside e B2 normally open contact infrared motion sensor inside IDEC SmartRelay Manual 271 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Door control system with IDEC SmartRelaycircuit diagram This is what the circuit diagram of the conventional solution looks like You can simplify this circuit if you make use of the IDEC SmartRelay functions You can use the off delay function to replace the latching relay and the on delay The block diagram below illustrates this simplification Motion detector 34 I2 x Limit switch Door open Limit switch 13 Q2 Door closed Close 1 Q1 P 272 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 2 4 Special features and expansion options Options for increasing comfort and user friendliness are for example e You can connect an additional control switch with the positions Open Automatic Closed O A C e You can connect a buzzer to an output of the IDEC SmartRelay to warn of the closing of the door
125. Chapter 4 3 2 The on delay time TH and the off delay time TL can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 e Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 e Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 e Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 e Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number The timebase is configurable For information on valid ranges and parameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 144 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Timing diagram En l The bold section of the timing i diagram also appears in the Q symbol of the random generator Tis busy Ss gt TH To Functional description The 0 to 1 transition at input En triggers a random on delay time between 0 s and Ty The output is set when the on delay time has expired and if the signal at input En remains hi at least for the duration of this time The time is reset if input En is reset before the on delay time has e
126. D K2BM2 FL1D K2B2 FL1D K2BM2 L e L M M The terminal arrangement on the FL1D K2BN2 is different from that of the LEM LEM LtM L M Check te ena output w 22O me eoo terminals on the FL1D L D K2BM2 and replace the o FL1D K2B2 with the oR oo m FL1D K2BM2 B Funstop D os q BRUN STOP D FL1D K2BM2 Voltage output _ m a o 2200 2 ooooe 0 re e000 OUTPUT 2x 0 10V or 0 4 20m OUTPUT 2x 0 10V or 0 4 20mA rm2 2002 2 pa 220900 AAAA Vit Mi M V2 M2 2 Vit Mi 11 V2t M2 12 0 10V 0 10V O 10V 0 4 20mA om0V 0 10V RI RI RI R2 RI RI V1 V2 0 10 V DC V1 V2 0 10 V DC R1 gt 5 kO 11 12 0 4 20 mA R2 lt 2500 Note Caution for wiring the analog output terminals Check the analog output terminals and wire each output terminal to the external equipment according to the type of analog outputs Incorrect wiring may cause damage to the equipment connected to the analog output terminals The terminal arrangement on the FL1D K2BM2 is different from A N that of the FL1D K2B2 Check the analog output terminals on the FL1D K2BM2 and replace the FL1D K2B2 with the FL1D K2BM2 46 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay i
127. D OF 232 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay Parameter assignment refers to the configuration of the block parameters You can set delay times for time functions the switching times of timers counter threshold values the monitoring interval of an operating hours counter the on and off thresholds of the trigger and more You can configure the parameters In programming mode e In parameter assignment mode In programming mode the author of the circuit program also sets the parameters Parameter assignment mode allows the editing of parameters without having to modify the circuit program This feature is available so that you can edit parameters without having to change to programming mode The advantage The circuit program remains protected but can be adapted by the user to meet specific requirements Note In parameter assignment mode IDEC SmartRelay continues exe cution of the circuit program IDEC SmartRelay Manual 233 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay 5 1 Selecting parameter assignment mode Press ESC to change from RUN to parameter assignment mode 2008 05 26 Press ESC Note The following applies to earlier device versions up to FL1A e You open parameter assignment mode by
128. E 0 eects teste eeeeeteteteeetetaees 77 36 5 PaSSWOId i n nctinnotimiogwndat dati nine sigan 78 3 6 6 Switching IDEC SmartRelay to RUN mode ccceeeeeeeeeee 84 3 6 7 S CON CiPCUIt PrograM usisa piia ioia a 86 3 6 8 Deleting a Hobana e a Aaa 92 3 6 9 Deleting block QrOUps issiririaniinisiiu iania iaa 93 3 6 10 Correcting programming errors ssssssssssssssssssissesiereererrsrererreresnens 94 3 6 11 Selecting analog output values for RUN STOP transition 94 3 6 12 Defining the type of analog outputs 0 eect eeteeeeteeeeneeeeeeeens 95 3 6 13 Deleting the circuit program and password c ce eeeeeeeteeeeteeeens 96 3 6 14 Summertime wintertime conversion ecccceeeecseeeteeeteeeteeeteeeees 97 3 6 15 SYNMChrOniZation cecceceseececeseeeceeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeteeaeeceeeeeeeeateets 101 3 7 Memory space and Circuit program Size ssesecssseeeeeeeteeees 103 4 IDEC SmartRelay functions ccccseeeeeeee 109 4 1 Constants and Connectors CO ssssssssesssesseeesesseseeeeeeseeseenees 110 4 2 Basic functions list GF esssesessseseeseeseeeeeeeesaneeeeteentneeteeeeeeans 114 AOA AN Dinani ited haired heii Raines Ghana 115 4 2 2 AND with Edge Detection eececeeeeeseeeeeteteeteneeteneeeeteeeenees 116 4 2 3 NAND not AND uu cececececseseseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeaeeenesaeeeeeeeeanaeenes 116 4 2 4 NAND with Edge Detection 0 cc eeceeeceeteteeteneeteneceeteeneeeenees 117 G OASE
129. E H12RCE x x x x x FL1E H12SND x x FL1E H12RCA x x x x x FL1E H12RCC x x x FL1E B12RCE x x FL1E B12RCA x x x x x FL1E B12RCC x x x 22 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring Overview Connecting an additional expansion module to an expansion module Expansion Additional expansion modules module FLiB FLiB FLiB FL1B FLIB CM M08B2R2 M08B1S2 MO8D2R2 MO8C2R2 J2B2 FL1D K2B2 FL1D K2BM2 FL1B M08B2R2 x x x x x FL1B M08B1S2 x x x xX x FL1B M08D2R2 x x x x x FL1B M08C2R2 x x xX FL1B J2B2 FL1D K2B2 x x x x x FL1D K2BM2 CM AS Interface x x x x x When setting up expansion modules of different power volt ages take the following restrictions into consideration Note When you use a 24V DC power supply to supply power to 12 24V DC power type base module and 24V DC power type expansion I O modules use a 24V DC power supply which starts up within 10 seconds otherwise the base module does not recognize the expansion I O modules When the power supply voltage varies while the base module and the expansion I O modules are operating they normally operate within the permissible operating voltage range When using different power supplies supply power to the base module and expansion modules at the same time or suppl
130. E4 Car d Car d m4 CopyProtect m IDEC SmartRelay 5 Move the gt cursor to IDEC SmartRelay gt Card if required Press Aor V 6 Press OK IDEC SmartRelay now copies the circuit program to the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge If the memory cartridge is from an incompatible FL1A FL1C version IDEC SmartRelay displays this message Unknown Card Press ESC 254 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card When IDEC SmartRelay has finished copying it automatically returns you to the main menu gt Program Card Setup Start The circuit program backup is now stored on your memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge and you can remove the cartridge Do not forget to replace the cap If power fails while IDEC SmartRelay is copying the circuit program repeat the process after Power On Note The password of a protected circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay also applies to the copied program version on your memory car tridge or combined memory battery cartridge IDEC SmartRelay Manual 255 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card 6 4 Copying data from the memory cartridge to IDEC SmartRelay You can copy a
131. EC SmartRelay s place in information technology The wiring information in your IDEC SmartRelay manual is also found in the IDEC SmartRelay Product Info included with all devices For further information on programming the IDEC SmartRelay on your PC refer to the Online Help for WindLGC WindLGC is the programming software for PCs It runs under Windows It helps you to get started with IDEC SmartRelay and to write test print out and archive your programs independent of the IDEC SmartRelay Guide The manual is divided into 8 chapters Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring Programming IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay functions Configuring IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridges IDEC SmartRelay software Applications IDEC SmartRelay Manual iii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Preface Valid range of this manual The manual applies to devices of series FL1E New features of the FL1E IDEC SmartRelay device series iv Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com The Text Display provides an additional display device for messages and contains four cursor keys and four functions keys that can be used in the circuit program An additional password protection function is available in the Text Display version 4 or later and can only be enabled when the Text Displ
132. FIDEC F L 1 E series ipec SmartRelay User s Manual g et 5 je W J kais a IDEC CORPORATION Revision History Date Manual No Description November 2008 B 1090 0 First print December 2008 B 1090 1 Sensor connections for IDEC SmartRelay FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE FL1E H12SND February 2009 B 1090 2 e Compatibility FL1C PM3 memory cartridge in FL1E e Compatibility FL1E PM4 memory cartridge in older IDEC SmartRelay modules July 2009 B 1090 3 Deleting the circuit program and password Note September 2009 B 1090 4 e 1 The analog output module FL1D K2BM2 structure e 1 How to identify the IDEC SmartRelay Analog output module e 2 1 2 Setup with different voltage classes e 2 1 3 Compatibility FL1D K2BM2 e 2 2 3 Mounting the Text Display e 2 3 4 Connecting outputs Output Internal Circuit FL1D K2BM2 3 6 5 Password 3 6 5 Changing IDEC SmartRelay from RUN to STOP mode from the Text Display e 4 4 20 Analog amplifier Analog output e 6 Compatibility FL1C PM3 memory cartridge in FL1E e 6 Compatibility FL1E PM4 memory cartridge in older IDEC SmartRelay modules e A 1 General technical data Degree of protection A 11 Technical data FL1D K2BM2 E Type Number FL1D K2BM2 July 2010 B 1090 5 e 1 How to identify the IDEC SmartRelay Base module e 4 4 11 Seven day tim
133. FL1E B12RCA Digital AC DC Input 5V Internal Circuit 11 18 O 1502 Circuit 100nF FL1B M08D2R2 Digital AC DC Input Note Bleeder resistance R3 calculation R3 must satisfy the following three conditions Condition 1 R3 9 lt Maximum input OFF voltage 5V AC Maximum sensor leakage current A Sensor power voltage V Minimum sensor load current A The voltage drop across the load R3 must be less than 5V while the sensor is turned off Condition 2 R3 Q lt Sensor power voltage V 2 Condition 3 Pr3 W R3 resistance Q x 3 3 recommended allowance IDEC SmartRelay Manual 41 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE FL1E H12SND Digital DC Input 270kQ 1i I8 O L_ Internal Circuit FL1B M08B2R2 FL1B M08B1S2 Digital DC Input 11 I8 O Internal Circuit FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE FL1E H1i2SND Analog Input 0 10V 54kQ 11 12 17 18 O L_ Internal Circuit 5V FL1B J2B2 Analog Input 0 10V 38kQ U1 U2 O L_ Internal Circuit 5V 42 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring FL1B J2B2 Analog Input 0 20mA 30 1252 Internal My a 125Q 10nF M1 M2 o Note Fluctuating analog values are due to screening o
134. R A signal at input R resets the on delay time and the output Parameter T represents the on delay time for the output output status transition 0 to 1 Retentivity no retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q Q is set after the time T has expired Parameter T Note the defaults specified in Chapter 4 3 2 The time for parameter T can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions PS comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 er ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number The timebase is configurable For information on valid ranges and parameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Timing diagram Trg JL LI A L dem o Eo Ta expires he T rs The bold section of the timing diagram is also shown in the symbol of the retentive on delay 138 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Functional desc
135. Select the required function by the block number The timebase is adjustable Please note the following listing Valid ranges of the timebase if T parameter Timebase max value min resolution Accuracy s seconds 99 99 10 ms 10ms m minutes 99 59 1s 15 h hours 99 59 1 min 1 min The display in programming mode example B12 T 04 10h R Valid ranges of the timebase if T Actual value of an already programmed function Timebase max value Meaning Accuracy ms 99990 Number of ms 10 ms s 5999 Number of s 18 m 5999 Number of min 1 min 132 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay Manual IDEC SmartRelay functions The display in programming mode example B12 R T B006 qm If the referenced block B6 in the example returns a value that lies out of the valid range the value is rounded up or down to the next valid value Parameter preset Actual value of an already programmed function How to include the actual value of an already programmed function 1 Press to move the cursor to the equal sign of parameter T B12 ER B12 R T 04 10h S T 04 10h gt twice 2 Press w to change the equal sign into an arrow If it exists the last referenced block and its timebase is shown B12 R T wB006s
136. SmartRelay E Input En You can use input EN to set and reset ray LLN Q the asynchronous pulse generator Far Input INV Input INV can be used to invert the output signal of the active asynchronous pulse generator Parameter You can configure the pulse width Ty and the interpulse width T Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q_ Q is set and reset cyclically according to the pulse pause ratio Ty and TL 142 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameters TH and TL Note the information on parameter T in Chapter 4 3 2 The pulse width TH and the interpulse width TL can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 e Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 e Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 e Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 e Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number The timebase is configurable For information on valid ranges and p
137. SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameter p number of decimals Does not apply to the display of On Off and Ax values ina message text Timing diagram A Function with negative difference A Timing diagram B Function with positive difference A Off On A Functional description The function fetches the analog signal at input Ax Ax is multiplied by the value of the A gain parameter and the value at parameter B offset is added to product i e Axegain offset actual value of Ax Output Q is set or reset depending on the set On thresold and difference value A The function automatically calculates the Off parameter Off On A whereby A may be positive or negative See the calculation rule below Calculation rule e When you set a negative differential value A the On threshold gt Off threshold and Q 1 if the actual value Ax gt On Q 0 if the actual value Ax lt Off See the timing diagram A e When you set a positive differential value A the On threshold lt the Off threshold and Q 1 if On lt actual value Ax lt Off See the timing diagram B IDEC SmartRelay Manual 175 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Setting the Par parameter
138. SmartRelay memory until you explicitly delete it You can save the actual values of special functions in the case of a power outage assuming that these functions support the Retentive parameter and that the necessary program memory is available The Retentive parameter is deactivated when you insert a function to use it you must enable this option IDEC SmartRelay Manual Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 6 4 Assigning a circuit program name You can assign your circuit program a name that consists of up to 16 uppercase lowercase letters numbers and special characters In the programming menu 1 Move the gt cursor to Edit Press Vora 2 Accept Edit Press OK 3 Move the gt cursor to Edit Name Press Vora 4 Accept Edit Name Press OK Press V and A to list the alphabet numbers and special characters either in ascending or descending order You can select any letter number or character To enter a space character simply move the cursor with gt to the next position This character is the first one in the list Examples Press W once to select an A A four times to select etc The following character set is available AJB C D JE TF JGJH I JJ K LIM IN O PIQ R IS TI U JVIW X Y Z a lb e dte f g h i s j ki Il m njo p q yrys ft fu viw xiy z o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 T eT S a
139. SmartRelay without display see Chapter 6 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 325 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay without display Operating characteristics IDEC SmartRelay is ready for operation when power is switched on Switching off an IDEC SmartRelay without display is equivalent to disconnecting the power supply e g as if you were removing the plug The circuit program of FL1E B12 versions cannot be started or stopped by means of buttons This is why the FL1E B12 versions have other startup characteristics Startup characteristics If there is no circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay or on the inserted memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge IDEC SmartRelay remains in STOP If there is a valid circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay memory the IDEC SmartRelay automatically switches from STOP to RUN when power is switched on The circuit program on an inserted memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge is automatically copied to IDEC SmartRelay immediately after power is switched on The existing circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay memory is overwritten The system automatically changes from STOP to RUN Provided the PC cable is connected to IDEC SmartRelay you can download the circuit program to IDEC SmartRelay and start it by means of WindLGC PC software see Chapter 7 1 Operating status indication Operating states e g Power On
140. The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application View in programming mode example B 3 1 lt Parameter protection mode On 04000 lt On off threshold A 02000 Differential value for the on off threshold Press gt B3 2 A 01 00 Gain B 00000 lt Offset p Z lt ___ _ Decimals in the message text View in parameter assignment mode example a 04000 W On threshold la Differential value for the off E on Press B3 Of f 02000 lt off threshold 176 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 18 Analog comparator Short description The output is set and reset depending on the difference Ax Ay and on two configurable thresholds Symbol in IDEC SmartRelay as AA y a Par l Wiring Inputs Ax and Ay Description You apply the analog signals the difference of which you want to analyze at the inputs Ax and Ay Use the analog inputs Al1 Al8 the analog memory markers AM1 AM6 the block number of a function with analog output or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 Parameter A Gain Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 On On threshold Range of values 20 000 Off Off threshold Range of values 20 000 p Number of decimals Range of values
141. Trg during T retriggers the time Ta If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure Setting the Par parameter Note the defaults specified in Chapter 4 3 2 Note All times must have the same timebase View in programming mode example B9 1 R Protection mode and retentivity T 60 005 lt Off delay time Press gt B9 2 T 05 005 lt Start of the off warning period T T T L 00 105 lt Off warning time IDEC SmartRelay Manual 147 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions View in parameter assignment mode example B9 1 T 60 00s Current value of T Ta 06 005 lt 4 4 10 Dual function switch Short description Switch with two different functions e Pulse switch with off delay Switch permanent lighting Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input Trg A signal at input Trg Trigger sets output Q permanent light or resets Q ul with an off delay When active output Q can be reset with a signal at input Trg Input R A signal at input R resets the current time T and resets the output Parameter T represents the off delay time The output is reset 1 to 0 transition when time T expires T represents the time during which the output must be set to enable the permanent light function T represents the on
142. a specified rate Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay En Input En A change in the status from 0 to 1 at Cal J oe input En Enable applies the start C4 ha AG stop level Offset B StSp to the Far output for 100 ms and starts the ramp operation to the selected level A change in the status from 1 to 0 immediately sets the current level to Offset B which makes output AQ equal to 0 Input Sel Sel 0 Level 1 is selected Sel 1 Level 2 is selected A change in status of Sel causes the current level to start changing to the selected level at the specified rate Input St A change in the status from 0 to 1 at input St Decelerated Stop causes the current level to decrease at a constant rate until the start stop level Offset B StSp is reached The start stop level is maintained for 100ms and then the current level is set to Offset B which makes output AQ equal to 0 212 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Parameter Level 1 and Level 2 Levels to be reached Range of values for each level 10 000 to 20 000 MaxL Maximum value that must not be exceeded under any circumstances Range of values 10 000 to 20 000 StSp Start Stop offset value that is added to Offset B to create the start
143. afety pressure bar prevents harm to persons and objects from getting trapped or damaged when the gate is closing IDEC SmartRelay Manual 281 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 4 2 Previous solution Various control systems are used to operate automatic gates The circuit diagram below shows one of these options Auxiliary circuit so 1 7 t siE k1 82 aa K3 KI r ka s2 s f E S5 pst s5 PH Ks f Kt f K A K4 oJ T Em S Sear ke f Ks f e e Ki KED KOI K4 EO Hi K5 K6 N gt gt Open Close Indicator lamp Open Close Wiring of a gate control system with FL1E H12RCC L1 e e L K1 kd hd hd Open Close Indicator lamp 282 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Components used e Ki e K2 e 0 normally closed contact e 1 normally open contact e S2 normally open contact e 8 normally closed contact e 4 normally closed contact e 5 normally closed contact contactor relay contactor relay STOP pushbutton OPEN pushbutton CLOSE pushbutton Position sensor OPEN Position sensor CLOSED Safety bar Block diagram of the IDEC SmartRelay solution
144. al factory gates page 285 Luminous rows page 289 Service water pump page 293 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 263 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Note IDEC SmartRelay applications are available to all our customers free of charge The examples provided are noncommittal serve as general information about the fields of application for IDEC SmartRelay and may be different to user specific solutions The user operates the system at his own responsibility We refer to the relevant national standards and system related installation regulations Although you have four inputs available for logic operations basic functions see Chapter 4 2 the following figures will only show a maximum of three inputs for reasons of clarity You program this fourth input and assign parameters just like the other three inputs Errors can not be ruled out and the right to make changes is reserved 264 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 1 Stairway or corridor lighting 8 1 1 Requirements for a stairway lighting system The basic requirements for a stairway lighting system are as follows When someone is using the stairway the lighting should be switched on e If no one is in the stairway the lights should be switched off in order to save energy Previous solution The two co
145. al to be monitored at input Ax Use the analog inputs Al1 AI8 the analog memory markers AM1 AM6 the block number of a function with analog output or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 Parameter A Gain Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 Aj Difference value above Aen on off threshold Range of values 0 20 000 Ap Difference value below Aen on off threshold Range of values 0 20 000 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive in memory Output Q_ Q is set reset depending on the stored analog value and the offset Al1 Al8 0 10 V corresponds with 0 1000 internal value Gain and offset parameters For more information on gain and offset parameters refer to Chapter 4 3 6 Parameters Delta1 and Delta2 The Delta1 and Delta2 parameters can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual value of the following functions 182 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter
146. alculation for the MN MN will take on the value of MI 166 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Setting the Par parameter View in programming mode B16 1 R B16 1 R M 0100h Mi gt BOOLh 00 m B16 2 R OT 00030h 00 m B16 3 R 0 0 RtEn Ml is the configurable time interval The permissible range of values is 0 to 9999 hours For information on how to assign the actual value of another already programmed function to a parameter see section 4 4 1 View in parameter assignment mode B16 1 MI 0100h Time interval 00 m B16 2 OT 00083h Total operating hours 15 m B16 3 MN 0016h lt Time to go 45 m IDEC SmartRelay Manual 167 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 15 Frequency trigger Short description The output is set and reset with two configurable frequency triggers Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input Fre The function counts the 0 to 1 Fre AN transitions at input Fre 1 to 0 Far TLF eA transitions are not counted Use inputs 13 14 15 I6 for fast counting only FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1E H12SND max 5 kHz any other input or circuit component for counting low frequency signals typ 4 Hz Parameter On
147. alue AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number The timebase is configurable For information on valid ranges and parameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 139 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Timing diagram Tr The bold section of the g timing diagram also Q appears in the symbol of the wiping relay Ta is expiring T be T has not expired Functional description A Oto 1 transition at input Trg sets the output and triggers a time T during which the output remains set Output Q is reset to lo pulse output when Ta reaches the value preset at T Ta T The output is immediately reset if there is a 1 to 0 transition at input Trg before the specified time has expired If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure 4 4 6 Edge triggered interval time delay relay Short description An input pulse generates a preset number of output pulses with a defined pulse pause ratio retriggerable after a configured delay time has expired Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Ty AFL Input Trg Asignal at input Trg Trigger triggers R Toke the times for the edge triggered Far interval time d
148. ameter assignment mode 192 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Note If Trg 0 and Par RS the special function Current impulse relay corresponds with the special function Latching relay see Chapter 4 4 21 4 4 23 Message texts Short description With the message text function block you can configure a message that includes text and other parameters for IDEC SmartRelay to display in RUN mode You can configure simple message texts from the IDEC SmartRelay Display WindLGC provides an extended set of features for message texts bar graph representation of data names for digital I O states and more Refer to the WindLGC documentation for information on these features Global Message Text Settings You configure global parameters that apply to all message texts from the Msg Config selections on the Programming menu e Analog Time refresh rate in milliseconds that specifies how frequently analog inputs in message texts are updated e Tick time frequency at which message texts scroll on and off the display There are two ways that a message text can tick on and off the screen line by line or character by character which are described in more detail below A line of a text message or each character of a text message in turn will tick on and off the IDEC SmartRelay Display based on the tick time
149. arameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Timing diagram En Inv 4 io Taite Ta a Tir Ta Ta Tp Functional description You can configure the pulse interpulse width at the Ty Time High and T Time Low parameters Input Inv can be used to invert the output signal provided the block is enabled with a signal at input EN If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure IDEC SmartRelay Manual 143 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 8 Random generator Short description The output of the random generator is set or reset within a configured time Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay TL Input En A positive edge 0 to 1 transition at En QO input En Enable triggers the on Par JJ L delay time of the random generator A negative edge 1 to 0 transition at input En Enable triggers the off delay time of the random generator Parameter The on delay is set at random to a value between 0 s and Ty The off delay is set at random to a value between 0 s and T_ Output Q Output Q is set when the on delay has expired and if En is still set It is reset when the off delay has expired provided En was not set again meanwhile Parameter Ty and TL Note the defaults of the Ty and T parameters listed in
150. asis With any mode you can also configure the timer to pulse the output during the defined time period The time period is configurable within the date range of January 1 2000 to December 31 2099 Note Because FL1E H12SND does not have a real time clock the twelve month time switch is not available for this version Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Cam At the Cam parameter you configure Wo Q parameter the timer mode the on off times for the timer and whether the output is a pulse output Output Q Q is set when the configured cam is switched on Timing diagrams Example 1 Yearly mode on Monthly mode off Pulse Off On Time 2000 06 01 Off Time 2099 08 31 Every year on June 1 the timer output switches on and remains on until August 31 2008 2009 2010 2011 YYYYNM DD AAM j On 2000 06 01 i B Q Off 2099 08 31 LESS Jun Aug Jun Aug Jun Aug Jun Aug 31 u 3X u 3 01 31 oH B6 1 B6 2 B6 Yearly On ON OFF Monthl y Off YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD Pulse Off 2000 06 01 2099 08 31 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 155 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Example 2 Yearly mode on Monthly mode off Pulse on On Time 2000 03 15 Off Time 2099 Every year on March 15 the timer switches on for one cycle YYYYMM DD __
151. at input Dir Symbol in IDEC SmartRelay k F gnt Par Wiring Input R Description A signal at input R resets the internal count value to zero Input Cnt The function counts the 0 to 1 transitions at input Cnt 1 to 0 transitions are not counted Use e inputs 13 14 15 and I6 for fast counting only FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1E H12SND max 5 kHz any other input or circuit component for counting low frequency signals typ 4 Hz Input Dir You set the direction of count at input Dir Dir 0 Up count Dir 1 Down count Parameter On On threshold Range of values 0 999999 Off Off threshold Range of values 0 999999 StartVal Initial value from which to begin counting either down or up Retentivity for internal counter value Cnt No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q Q is set or reset depending on the current value at Cnt and the set thresholds IDEC SmartRelay Manual 161 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameters On and Off The on threshold On and the off threshold Off can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions ETS comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog ampli
152. ating control system the supply Ty and return line temperatures T are to be compared for example with a sensor at Al2 A control signal is to be triggered for example heater On when the difference between the supply and return line temperatures is greater than 15 The control signal is reset when the difference is less than 5 C The process variable of the temperature is to be shown in parameter assignment mode The thermocouples available have the the following technical data 30 to 70 C 0 to 10 VDC Application Internal mapping 30 to 70 C 0 to10 VDC 0to 1000 0 C 300 Offset 30 Range of values 1000 30 to 70 C 100 Gain 100 1000 0 1 On threshold 15 C Threshold 15 Off threshold 5 C Threshold 5 See also Chapter 4 3 6 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 179 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Configuration example B3 On 1 00015 Protection mode lt On threshold Off 00005 q Off threshold Press gt B3 2 A 00 10 lt Gain B 00030 Offset p lt _ Decimals in the message text if used View in parameter assignment mode example B3 1 On 00015 On threshold Off 00005 lt Off threshold Press B3 2 Ax Z00010 T roroa waus A 00030 2 1 differential
153. ations Components used K1 K2 SO normally open contact S1 normally open contact S2 normally open contact S3 normally open contact S4 normally closed contact S5 normally closed contact S6 normally closed contact Master control system Q5 Q6 19 110 IDEC SmartRelay Manual contactor relay open contactor relay close cord operated switch open cord operated switch close OPEN pushbutton CLOSE pushbutton position sensor GATE IS OPEN position sensor GATE IS CLOSED Safety bar position sensor GATE IS OPEN position sensor GATE IS CLOSED external pushbutton OPEN GATE external pushbutton CLOSE GATE 287 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Block diagram of the IDEC SmartRelay solution 15 l1 17 l6 288 Gate is open Open gate Open gate Tat Open gate Gate is open Open gate by hand Gate is open Close gate by hand Gate is closed Tae Safety bar L Close Gate is closed gate Gate is closed Safety bar Safety bar x 1 Gate is open L_ Tos Open Close 1 Gate is closed L Tae The OPEN GATE and CLOSE GATE pushbuttons initiate the gate motion provided it is not already moving in the other direction The gate motion ends at the respective limit switch Closing of the gate is also interrupt
154. ator or a Chinese version of Microsoft Windows The Chinese character set requires a Chinese version of Windows or a Chinese emulator to properly display Chinese characters in the WindLGC message text editor You must start the Chinese emulator before you open the the message text function block in WindLGC Programming Global Message Text Parameters Edit Clear Prg Password gt Msg Config 1 Step through values of 100 200 Set the fianalog Time 400 800 or 1000 ms to increase or Analog eee oc Presse decrease the analog input refresh Refresh CurrCharSet oe time IDEC SmartRelay updates the Time value and cursor position between Press 1s and 1s to show your current b selection Select digit position to modify Serine pana log Time 00200 Press za You Cannot modify the last two Tick Time CharSets Press ar sears CurrCharSet OK digits ay Press a Select value from 0 to 9 for the er current position Minimum tick time meee is 100 ms Maximum tick time is T 10000 ms Select Analog Time p Pearse a O Press A ic i me CharSet2 a or v Character Tam BE i Sethe CharSett or i Meis CharSet2 selection irads Press a Select between CharSet1 s Y and CharSet2 Select Analog Time gt CharSet1 Current aiei gim Press CharSet2 Press a Select CharSet1 or CharSet2 for Character e ea or the current character set Set IDEC SmartRelay Manual P
155. ay Manual 323 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Determining the cycle time 324 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Because some specific applications do not require operator control and monitoring units such as buttons or a display we provide the FL1E B12RCE FL1E B12RCA and FL1E B12RCC versions without display View of a FL1E B12RCC for example DADODODAOAIAAYS Less is definitely more The versions without display offer you the following benefits Even more cost effective without the operating element Requires less switch cabinet space than conventional hardware Substantial benefits with regard to flexibility and prime costs compared to stand alone electronic switchgear Of advantage even for applications in which merely two or three conventional switching devices can be replaced Very easy to use Access protected Compatible to IDEC SmartRelay versions with display Offers the option to read data by means of WindLGC Creating a circuit program without operator panel There are two ways to create a circuit program for an IDEC SmartRelay without display You create the circuit program with WindLGC on your PC and then download it to IDEC SmartRelay see Chapter 7 You download the circuit program from an IDEC Smart Relay memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge to your IDEC
156. ay is used together with IDEC SmartRelay Base modules version 4 or later The new IDEC SmartRelay Battery cartridge and the IDEC SmartRelay Combined Memory Battery cartridge provide up to two years of backup time for the real time clock The new IDEC SmartRelay Memory cartridge and the Combined Memory Battery cartridge provide 32 Kbytes memory space Additional optional analog inputs and fast digital inputs are available on some of the FL1E IDEC SmartRelay base modules FL1E IDEC SmartRelay configuration menus can be displayed in ten supported languages You have a configuration choice to specify the language for IDEC SmartRelay menus New instruction blocks are available Pulse Width Modulator PWM Analog Math and Analog Math Error Detection Message texts can tick on and off the display can include bar graphs can switch between two character sets and can be displayed on either the IDEC SmartRelay Display the Text Display or both Full editing capabilities are available from WindLGC editing from the IDEC SmartRelay base module is limited to simple text See section 2 1 3 for further details USB PC cable between a PC and IDEC SmartRelay base module is available as an option You can now have up to 200 program blocks in your circuit program IDEC SmartRelay Manual Preface Additional differences compared to previous devices FL1A to FL1D Extended set of reference parameters for function blocks e Enhancements to up
157. ay time T the pre warning time T and the pre warning period T can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions fiers comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 1 e Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 e Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 e Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 e Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number The timebase is configurable For information on valid ranges and parameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 146 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Timing diagram Trg q _f lt Ty gt 1 Ta is busy lt T beth T gt Functional description A 0 to 1 signal transition at input Trg sets output Q The next 1 to 0 transition at Trg retriggers the current time T and output Q remains set Output Q is reset when T T You can output a warning signal before the off delay time T T has expired to reset Q for the time of the pre warning period T A further one shot at input
158. can customize these under menu item To do so 1 Confirm On once again Press OK 2 Move the gt cursor to Press Aor Y 3 Confirm the menu item Press OK The display shows Cursor solid square MM DD gt Month MM and Day DD 1 01 Start of summertime 01 01 gt End of summertime The desired time zone A 000min difference in min Let us assume you want to configure the following parameters Start of summertime 31st March end of summertime 1st November time difference of 120 minutes This is how you can enter your data e Press lt and to move the solid square cursor e Press A and W to change the value at the cursor position The display shows MM DD 03 31 31 March 11 01 gt 1 November A 120min gt Time difference of 120 min e Confirm all your entries with OK You have now customized the summertime wintertime conversion The IDEC SmartRelay display now shows gt On Off S W Time On gt IDEC SmartRelay indicates that summertime wintertime conversion is enabled and that user defined parameters have been set 100 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Note To disable summertime wintertime conversion in this menu you merely
159. ccascnct incense ere 297 A 1 General technical data scsssssscsessssesesseessenseeseneteeesnenaeneeanas 297 A 2 Technical data FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC scscsessseeeee 299 A 3 Technical data FL1B MO8C2R2 scssssecsessseeteeeteesetnenaeeeeaees 302 A4 Technical data FL1E H12SND ccsssssssessstseeseeeeeeeesanenseeeeanas 305 IDEC SmartRelay Manual xi Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com A 5 Technical data FL1B M08B1S2 ccssesssssessesssssseseseseees 307 A 6 Technical data FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA eeeee 309 A 7 Technical data FL1B MO8D2R2 eccscseseseseseseseseeesteeees 312 A 8 Technical data FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1B MO8B2R2 s csecsssseeeeeseeeneneees 314 A 9 Switching capacity and service life of the relay outputs 317 A 10 Technical data FL1B J2B2 scscsssesssesseseesesenensenenseeeeseeetenens 318 A 11 Technical data FL1D K2B2 FL1D K2BM02 2 ceeeeee 319 A 12 Technical data Text Display sssecsseseserssseresseeeseeesseeenseens 320 B Determining the cycle time csccseeseeeeees 321 C IDEC SmartRelay without display 000 325 D IDEC SmartRelay menu structure 00 329 D 1 IDEC SmartRelay base module sssssssssssssnsununnenunnununnununnenunnennnne 329 D2 Text Display si cisisccctiiiteidiannantininnctiinninheiain 331 E Typ
160. cent lamps with capacitors the technical data of fluorescent lamp ballasts must also be considered If the maximum allowed surge current is exceeded fluorescent lamps must be switched with appropriate contactor relays 1 8 V DC Version 1 to 5 specifications 2 1 0 mA Version 1 to 5 specifications 316 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay Manual Technical data A 9 Switching capacity and service life of the relay outputs Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with ohmic load heating Switching cycles million A 12 24 V AC DC Maximum 10 A 0 57 100 110 VAC Maximum 10 A 230 240 V AC Maximum 10 A 0 4 120 V DC Maximum 0 2 A jal 240 V DC Maximum 0 1 A 0 24 0 14 2 4 6 8 10 Switched current A Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with high inductive load to IEC 947 5 1 DC 13 AC 15 contactors solenoid coils motors Switching cycles million A 12 24 V AC DC Maximum 2 A 1 07 100 110 VAC Maximum 3 A 0 94 230 240 V AC Maximum 3 A 0 84 120 V DC Maximum 0 2 A 0 75 240 V DC Maximum 0 1 A 0 64 0 54 0 44 ae 0 34 ee 0 2 yee 0 15 3 Switched current A IDEC SmartRelay Manual 317 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data A 10 Technical data FL1B J2B2 FL1B J2B2 Power supply Input voltage 12 24 V DC P
161. ches the off relay transistor outputs on or off Note After switching the power on the system briefly switches through the outputs on the FL1E H12SND With an open circuit a voltage of gt 8 V can occur for up to approximately 100 ms when loaded this time reduces to a matter of microseconds 54 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring IDEC SmartRelay expansion modules operating states IDEC SmartRelay expansion modules have three operating states The LED RUN STOP is lit green red or orange Green RUN LED RUN STOP is lit Red STOP Orange Yellow The expansion module communicates with the device to the left The expansion module does not communicate with the device to its left Initialization phase of the expansion module CM AS Interface communication states The CM AS Interface has three communication states The LED is lit green red or flashes red yellow Green LED AS I is lit Red Red Yellow AS Interface communication OK AS Interface communication failed Slave has address 0 CM AS Interface behavior on communication failure If the AS Interface voltage fails communication between the IDEC SmartRelay system and the expansion modules which are arranged to the right of the IDEC SmartRelay CM AS Interface expansion module i
162. ching cycles Fluorescent tubes conventionally 1x58 W 1x58 W compensated 25000 switching cycles Fluorescent tubes uncompensated 10 x 58 W 10x58 W 25000 switching cycles Derating none across the entire temperature range none across the entire temperature range Short circuit proof cos 1 Power protection B16 600A Power protection B16 600A IDEC SmartRelay Manual 315 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data Short circuit proof cos 0 5 to 0 7 FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE Power protection B16 900A FL1B M08B2R2 Power protection B16 900A Parallel output circuits for power Not permitted Not permitted increase Protection of output relay max 16 A max 16 A if desired characteristic B16 characteristic B16 Minimum Switching Load 10 mA 12 V DC 10 mA 12 V DC Initial Contact Resistance 100 mQ maximum at 1A 24V DC 100 mQ maximum at 1A 24V DC Mechanical Life 10 000 000 operations minimum no load 10 Hz 10 000 000 operations minimum no load 10 Hz Electrical Life 100 000 operations minimum rated resistive load 1800 operations hour 100 000 operations minimum rated resistive load 1800 operations hour Switching rate Mechanical 10 Hz 10 Hz Ohmic load lamp load 2 Hz 2 Hz Inductive load 0 5 Hz 0 5 Hz Notice For fluores
163. ck The last two inputs of the block a ll remain unused and are identified by the 2 Q creator of the circuit program with an x These special functions offer you significantly greater performance e Current impulse relay e Up down counter e On delay Softkey Chapter 4 gives a full list of the IDEC SmartRelay functions 60 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Block representation on the IDEC SmartRelay display The figure below shows a typical view of the IDEC SmartRelay display As you can see it can show only one block at a time We have therefore introduced block numbers to help you check the circuit structure View of the IDEC SmartRelay Block number assigned by IDEC SmartRelay Another block is connected at this point B1 TE e Input B2 4 TSE m Q1 oe This connector is Block Output not required Assigning a block number IDEC SmartRelay assigns each new block in a circuit program a block number IDEC SmartRelay uses these block numbers to indicate the block interconnections This means that these numbers are mainly an aid to your orientation in the circuit program 44 Block numbers B2 adl 1 These blocks are 12 lpi interconnected T B3 B1 x4 21 i x Y gt 21 144 ____ o I5 B1 4 B3 7 Ql B1 Q1 I6 a
164. clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Text Display function keys The Text Display has four function keys that you can use in your circuit program You program these keys in the same way as other inputs Like the cursor keys you can press these keys when IDEC SmartRelay is in RUN mode to affect the behavior of the circuit program and to save switches and inputs They are identified as F1 F2 F3 and F4 Levels Voltage levels are designated hi and lo A constant 1 hi or 0 lo status at the block can be set by means of a permanent voltage level or constant value hi or lo Open connectors Unused block connectors can be identified with an x IDEC SmartRelay Manual 113 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 2 Basic functions list GF 114 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Basic functions represent simple logical elements of Boolean algebra You can invert the inputs of individual basic functions that is the circuit program inverts a logical 1 at a relevant input to a logical 0 if 0 is set at the input the program sets a logical 1 A programming example is found in Chapter 3 6 3 The GF list contains the basic function blocks you can use for your circuit program The following basic functions are Parallel circuit with
165. clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 2 7 XOR exclusive OR The XOR in a circuit diagram Symbol in IDEC shown as series circuit with 2 SmartRelay changeover contacts T HFa 2 The output status of the XOR is 1 if the inputs are not equivalent At an unused block input x x 0 XOR function logic table 1 2 Q 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 4 2 8 NOT Negation Inverter A normally closed contact in Symbol in IDEC the circuit diagram SmartRelay a 1d the The output status is 1 if the input is 0 The NOT block inverts the input status Advantage of the NOT block for example IDEC SmartRelay does not require normally closed contacts You simply use a normally open contact and the NOT block to convert these into a normally closed contact NOT function logic table 1 Q 0 1 1 0 120 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 3 Special functions Because of their different input designation you can see right away that there is a difference between the special functions and basic functions SFs contain timer functions retentive functions and various parameter assignment options which allow you to adapt the circuit program to suit your own requirements This section provides you with a brief overview of input designations and with some particular background information on SFs The SF
166. d optionally igital inputs can be operated either with P or with N action 10 V 0 4 20 mA can be connected optionally The following communication modules can be connected to IDEC SmartRelay E Name Power supply IDEC Smart 30 V DC Relay CM AS Interface Inputs the next four inputs after the physical inputs of IDEC SmartRelay Ip ste In 3 Outputs the next four outputs after the physical outputs of IDEC SmartRelay Qh a Qn 3 Text Display Module The following Text Display module is available Symbol Name Supply voltage Display Text Display 24 V AC DC 12V DC 4 row display LCD 128 x 64 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Certification and approvals IDEC SmartRelay is certified to cULus and FM e cULus Haz Loc Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL to UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment CSA C22 2 No 142 Process Control Equipment UL 1604 Hazardous Location CSA 213 Hazardous Location APPROVED for use in Class l Division 2 Group A B C D Tx Class I Zone 2 Group IIC Tx e FM Approval Factory Mutual Research FM to Approval Standard Class Number 3611 3600 3810 APPROVED for use in Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Tx Class I Zone 2 Group IIC Tx For further information se
167. d to FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE Lo L1B M08 FI IITA Q5 Q6 1 LY 2 Q2 2022022 amp Load Load N M 4 Protection with automatic circuit breaker max 16 A characteristics B16 e g Power circuit breaker 5SX2 116 6 if required IDEC SmartRelay with transistor outputs IDEC SmartRelay versions with transistor outputs can be identified by the fact that the letter R is missing from their type name The outputs are short circuit proof and overload proof An auxiliary load voltage supply is not necessary because IDEC SmartRelay supplies the load voltage L1 L 44 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring Requirements for transistor outputs The load connected to IDEC SmartRelay must have the following characteristics The maximum switched current is 0 3 A per output Connecting This is how you connect the load to an IDEC SmartRelay with transistor outputs FL1B M08 280028 Q5 M Q6 M D DO D B QIM Q2 M Load Load Load 24 V DC 0 3 A max IDEC SmartRelay Manual 45 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring FL1D K2B2 FL1
168. damages All rights reserved in particular in the event of patents being granted or the registration of a utility model or design Disclaim of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Preface Preface Dear customer We thank you for purchasing IDEC SmartRelay and congratulate you on your decision With IDEC SmartRelay you have acquired a logic module that meets the stringent quality requirements of ISO 9001 IDEC SmartRelay can be used in many fields of applications Due to its high functionality and easy operation IDEC SmartRelay offers you the utmost efficiency for almost any application Purpose of this manual This IDEC SmartRelay manual provides you with information about the creation of circuit programs about the installation and use of FL1E IDEC SmartRelay base modules the Text Display and the IDEC SmartRelay expansion modules and about their compatibility with the previous FL1A FL1D versions FL1x are the last four characters of the order number of the base modules and differentiate the device series ID
169. disturbance AQ continues to increase decrease until the updated value PV again corresponds to SP The speed with which AQ changes depends on the parameters KC and TI If the input PV exceeds the parameter Max then the updated value PV is set to the value of Max If the PV falls short of the parameter Min then the updated value PV is set to the value of Min If the input R is set to 1 then the AQ output is reset As long as R is set the input A M is disabled Sampling time The sampling time is fixed at 500 ms Parameter sets For more information and application examples with application related parameter sets for KC TI and Dir refer to the online help for WindLGC 220 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Setting the Par parameter View in programming mode example B3 1 B3 2 SP B020 Press IKC 10 00 TI 01 00 Dir Press lt B3 3 B3 4 Mq B021 Press a otaeman Mi n 05000 B 00300 Max 05000 p 0 View in parameter assignment mode B3 1 B3 2 SP B020 Res KC 10 00 PV 0 TI 01 00 AQ 0250 Dir Press lt gt B3 3 B3 4 Mq B021 Ress fA 02 50 Mi n 05000 B 00300 Max 05000 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 221 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
170. dule outputs OV and OmA When internal values more than 1000 are inputted to the analog output the analog output module outputs 10V and 20mA The relationship between the internal value Ax inputted to the analog output and the analog output value Analog output value 10V 20mA 4 gt 1000 Internal value Ax 1000 186 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions e When the type of analog outputs is set to 4 20mA When internal values less than zero are inputted to the analog output the analog output module outputs current values less than 4mA When internal values more than 1000 are inputted to the analog output the analog output module outputs 20mA The relationship between the internal value Ax inputted to the analog output and the analog output value Analog output value 20mA 4 gt 1000 250 1000 Internal value Ax Note Using an Analog trigger you can determine that the internal values less than zero or more than 1000 are inputted to the analog output When the type of analog outputs is set to 4 20mA and internal values less than zero are inputted to the analog output it outputs current values less than 4mA You may need to prevent the analog output module from outputting current values less than 4mA To do this connect the Analog Multiplexer B007 in front of
171. e Digital outputs Number 4 Output type Relay outputs Electrical isolation Yes Dielectric Strength between power input terminals and output terminals 2 500 V AC 1minute 500 V DC 1 minute In groups of 1 Control of a digital input Yes Continuous current lin max 10 A per relay Surge current max 30A Incandescent lamp load 1000 W 25000 switching cycles at Fluorescent tubes with ballast 10x58 W 25000 switching cycles Fluorescent tubes conventionally 1x58 W compensated 25000 switching cycles 310 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay Manual Technical data Fluorescent tubes uncompensated 25000 switching cycles FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA 10 x58 W Derating none across the entire temperature range Short circuit proof cos 1 Power protection B16 600A Short circuit proof cos 0 5 to 0 7 Power protection B16 900A Parallel output circuits for power increase Not permitted Protection of output relay if desired max 16 A characteristic B16 Minimum Switching Load 10 mA 12 V DC Initial Contact Resistance 100 mQ maximum at 1A 24V DC Mechanical Life 10 000 000 operations minimum no load 10 Hz Electrical Life 100 000 operations minimum rated resistive load 1800 operations hour Switching rate
172. e that already has FL1E circuit program stored on it cannot be used in any device other than FL1E device A FL1E Battery cartridge or FL1E Memory Battery cartridge can only be used in FL1E devices Upward compatibility of circuit programs Circuit programs written for the previous versions FL1A FL1D can be transferred to FL1E units from WindLGC For detail about the compatibility of SmartRelay and memory cartridges refer to FAQ available on IDEC website IDEC SmartRelay Manual 249 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card 6 1 Security function CopyProtect The secuirty function provides copy protection for circuit programs on memory cartridges or combined memory battery cartridges Unprotected memory cartridges You can edit circuit programs without restrictions and exchange data between the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge and the device Protected memory cartridges A circuit program is protected when it is transferred from a protected program memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge to IDEC SmartRelay To execute this circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay the protected cartridge must remain inserted during RUN that is the circuit program stored on the cartridge cannot be copied to other IDEC SmartRelay devices Over and above that a protected circuit program is write protected
173. e Number S 2 2s cece 333 NAEK keanan Bence ovina Eerie veer Sees 335 xii IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Here s IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay is a universal logic module made by IDEC that integrates e Controls e Operator and display panel with background lighting e Power supply e Interface for expansion modules e Interface for a memory cartridge battery cartridge combined memory battery cartridge IDEC SmartRelay PC cable or USB PC cable e Interface for an optional text display TD module e Pre configured standard functions for example on and off delays current impulse relay and softkey e Timers e Digital and analog memory markers e Inputs and outputs according to the device type What IDEC SmartRelay can do for you IDEC SmartRelay offers solutions for domestic and installation engineering applications such as stairway lighting external lighting sun blinds shutters shop window lighting and more switch cabinet engineering as well as for mechanical and apparatus engineering such as gate control systems air conditioning systems rand ainwater pumps IDEC SmartRelay can also be implemented for special control systems in conservatories or greenhouses for control signal processing and by connecting a communication module such as an AS i module for distributed local controlling of machine
174. e Text Display back light setting Chapter 5 2 2 v gt Menu Lang Setting the menu language Chapter 5 2 3 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 331 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay menu structure Start Menu base module in RUN eens Ming max 50 message texts SmartRelay av K E Te Tal Mo 09 00 p 0 123456789 0 123456789 1 00000 gt 2008 05 26 4 1 0123456789 4 1 0123456 4 2 01000 4s e 2 01234 a 3 00253 i Date time Inputs A Outputs Analog inputs Al Al AQ M ESC C 4 00010 p 7 00000 p 1 00000 p 0 123456789 p A 5 00000 4 8 00000 4 2 01000 4l 1 0123456789 q 4 gt 6 00005 2 01234567 Vv Analog inputs Analog inputs Analog outputs Memory Markers Cursor keys ESC gt Stop ae Param Parameter assignment menu e Msg Config 332 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Type Numbers Table A IDEC SmartRelay Modules Name Type Number Rated Input Input Output Output Display Real Power Type Type Type Type and Time Voltage Digital Analog Relay Analog Keypad Clock Base FL1E H12RCC 100 Yes Module 240V 8 4 Yes SmartRe
175. e You can enable opening of the door time and direction dependent i e opening only during business hours and opening only from the inside after closing time 8 2 5 Extended solution with FL1E H12RCC Wiring the IDEC SmartRelay extended solution B1 B2 P dalod L1 Ki K2 H1 ia gt Open Close Buzzer IDEC SmartRelay Manual 273 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Block diagram of the extended IDEC SmartRelay solution Cam1 Detecting motion Day Mo Fr On 09 00 Off 18 00 Cam2 Day Sa On 08 00 Off 13 00 Cam1 Day Mo Fr On 09 00 Off 19 00 Cam2 Day Sa On 08 00 Off 14 00 Motion detector B2 Actuate motor for opening Close output Q2 Qi Limit switch Open Door open 14 Control switch 15 Door open Actuate motor for closing Limit switch 13 Door closed Q2 Open output Q1 Close Motion detector B1 k Motion detector B2 12 Control switch I6 Close door 274 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Detecting motion During business hours the motion detector B1 initiates the opening of the door when somebody wants to enter the shop Motion detector B2 initiates the opening of the door when somebody wants to
176. e calculation rule below Calculation rule Ifthe On threshold gt Off threshold then Q 1 iff gt On Q 0 iff S Off Ifthe On threshold lt Off threshold then Q 1 if On S fa lt Off Setting the Par parameter Note The system scans the counter limit value once per interval G_T View in programming mode example B1 5 1 Parameter protection mode On 0009 On threshold Off 0005 Off threshold Press gt B15 2 G T 01 005 lt Time interval for pulses a example IDEC SmartRelay Manual 169 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Note The seconds timebase is here set as permanent default When you preset a time G_T of 1 s IDEC SmartRelay returns the current frequency in parameter f in Hz View in parameter assignment mode example B15 On 0009 lt On threshold Off 0005 lt Offthreshold fa 0010 lt 0a 1 f gt On Note f always represents the total pulses measured per time unit G_T 170 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 16 Analog trigger Short description The output is set and reset at two configurable thresholds Description You apply the analog signal to be analyzed at input Ax Use the
177. e our Internet address Note You will find current approvals on the rating plate of the relevant module IDEC SmartRelay is issued with the CE Certificate of Conformity It is compliant with IEC 60730 1 and IEC 61131 2 and interference proof to EN 55011 Limit Class B Marine certification has been requested e ABS American Bureau of Shipping e BV Bureau Veritas e DNV Det Norske Veritas e GL Germanischer Lloyd e LRS Lloyds Register of Shipping e Class NK Nippon Kaiji Kyokai IDEC SmartRelay modules are therefore suitable for use in industrial and residential areas Use in Class Division 2 Group A B C and D locations or in non hazardous locations is supported 14 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Marine certification requires the surge protective device what manufactured by DEHN SOHNE GmbH Co in a case of 12 24V DC or 24V DC power line The required Type No and Part No BVT AD 24 918 402 See Note on page 298 For further information see our Internet address ID for Australia Our products carrying the label shown at the side are compliant with AS NZS 2064 1997 Class A standard Warning Risk of death personal injury or property damage can occur if you do not follow safety precautions for hazardous locations In potentially explosive atmospheres do not disconnect con
178. e switch e 4 4 12 Twelve month time switch e A 4 Technical data FL1E H12SND Backup of the real time clock at 25 C Accuracy of the real time clock e E Type Number FL1E H12SND December 2011 B 1090 6 7 IDEC SmartRelay software Adding Windows 7 to the supporting OS Deleting the description for LONWORKS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Safety guidelines gt gt This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol The notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken Caution with a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken Caution without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken Note indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the cor responding notice is not taken into account If more t
179. ed by the safety bar IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 6 Luminous rows Luminous rows 1 Luminous rows 2 E SE_ _ LBA BADDBPSII Luminous rows 3 Luminous rows 4 C Lh_ _ _ gt ES aBaB SS Office Corridor When planning lighting systems for commercial locations the type and number of lamps used is determined by the luminance required For reasons of cost efficiency the installation often consists of fluorescent tubes arranged in luminous rows and are divided into separate switching circuits according to the way the room is used 8 6 1 Requirements for a lighting system e The various luminous rows are switched on and off locally e Ifthere is sufficient daylight the rows on the window side of the room are automatically switched off by means of a daylight control switch e The lights are switched off automatically at 20 00 h e Local manual operation of the lighting must be possible at all times IDEC SmartRelay Manual 289 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 6 2 Previous solution L1 w H CH K1 siE s2E K2 aE s4E K3 K4 K5 K6 B1 E1 T a k Eg eE Ks LE kale ksl keZ E2X Es K 4X EK _ es a a ee ee The lamps are switched on and off with current impulse relays by means
180. ed memory battery cartridge 247 Communication module AS interface 3 Communication modules 3 Communications module AS interface 11 Compatibility Versions 249 Connecting AS interface bus 49 Inputs 35 outputs 44 Connector 26 Connectors 58 110 hi 59 IDEC SmartRelay 59 inputs 59 lo 59 open 113 outputs 59 unused 59 64 x 59 64 122 Constants 110 Conversion Summertime and wintertime 97 Correcting typing errors 94 Counter 336 Operating hours 164 Up down 161 CSA 14 cULus 14 Current impulse relay 191 Cursor 67 Cursor keys 58 112 204 Cursor movement 67 Cycle time 321 D Days of the week 152 Default values 239 Detection of math error Analog amplifier 230 Device types IDEC SmartRelay 2 Digital module 2 11 Dimensions 25 DIN rail 25 Display 61 Display contrast 241 Display lifetime Text Display 320 Display modules 2 Disposal 15 Divide by 0 error 230 DM8 See Digital module Dual function switch 148 E Earth connection 33 Edge evaluation 116 117 Edge triggered interval time delay relay 140 Editing 87 Errors analog math 230 Example Air conditioning system 276 Automatic door 269 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Index Factory door 281 factory door controlling 285 monitoring 285 lighting corridor 265 stairway 265 Luminous rows 289 Service water pump 293 exclusive OR 120 Expansion modules 2 5
181. elationship between output AQ and the current level Output AQ current level Offset B Gain A Note For further information on analog value processing please refer to the online help for WindLGC Setting the Par parameter View in programming mode example B3 1 B3 2 L1 04000 es MaxL 7000 L2 B020 t p 00222 Rate 00500 Press lt gt B3 3 A 02 50 lt Gain B 00300 lt _ Offset p 0 ______ __ Decimals in the message text IDEC SmartRelay Manual 215 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions View in parameter assignment mode B3 1 B3 2 L1 04000 2 StSp 00222 L2 B020 Rate 00500 AQ 00250 Press lt gt 3 B3 A 02 50 Gain B 00300 lt _ Offset 4 4 28 PI controller Short description Proportional action and integral action controllers You can use both types of controller individually or combined Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input A M Set the mode of the controller AM 1 automatic mode R 13 0 manual mode Py H AQ Input R Use the input R to reset the output p AQ As long as this input is set the ar input A M is disabled Output AQ is set to 0 Input PV Analog value process variable influences the output 216 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone
182. elay 5 2 3 Setting the menu language The language of the IDEC SmartRelay menus can be one of ten predefined languages CN Chinese DE German EN English ES Spanish FR French IT Italian NL Dutch RU Russian TR Turkish JP Japanese To set the menu language in parameter assignment mode 1 Select parameter assignment mode see Chapter 5 1 2 On the parameter assignment menu select Set Press V or A 3 Confirm Set Press OK 4 On the Set menu select Menu Lang Press Wor A 5 Confirm Menu Lang Press OK 6 Move the gt cursor to the language of your choice Press Aor V 7 Confirm language selection Press OK To set the menu language in programming mode If you want to set the menu language in programming mode select Setup in the main menu then menu Menu Lang You can now set the menu language as described earlier as of step 6 To reset IDEC SmartRelay to its default language setting If you want to restore IDEC SmartRelay to its default language setting English do the following 1 Switch off IDEC SmartRelay and then switch it on again 2 When an hour glass icon displays press lt gt and OK together until the English menu entries appear IDEC SmartRelay Manual 243 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay 5 2 4 Setting the number of Als in the base
183. elay FB as shown in Fig 1 if 11 is ON and the IDEC SmartRelay power is turned off and on the timer current value of the On delay FB is sometimes reset as shown in Fig 2 i B002 at Hea en Rem on 10 00s 05 45s Fig 1 ul B002 at dpa ah Rem on 10 00s 00 00s Fig 2 Other FBs are shown below e Function blocks whose timer current value is sometimes reset Off delay On delay On Off delay Retentive on delay Interval time delay relay Pulse output Edge triggered interval time delay relay Operating hours counter Asynchronous pulse generator Stairwell Light Switch Dual function switch e Function blocks whose output is sometimes set or reset when input I is connected to a S R connector with NOT Latching relay Current impulse relay 104 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Resources available in IDEC SmartRelay A circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay can occupy the following maximum resources Bytes Blocks 3800 200 REM 250 IDEC SmartRelay monitors memory utilization and offers only those functions from the lists for which it can actually provide sufficient memory space Memory requirements The table below shows an overview of the memory requirements for the basic and special function blocks
184. elay relay Input R A signal at input R resets the current time Ta and the output Parameter The interpulse width T and the pulse width T4 are configurable N determines the number of pulse pause cycles TL TH Range of values 1 9 Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q Q is set after TL has expired and reset after TH has expired 140 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameters TH and TL Note the information on parameter T in Chapter 4 3 2 The pulse width TH and the interpulse width TL can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 e Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 e Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 e Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 e Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number The timebase is configurable For information on valid ranges and parameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Timing diagram A
185. entiometer to inputs I1 12 I7 and I8 To allow you to achieve 10 V as the maximum value when you completely turn the potentiometer once you must connect a series resistor on the potentiometer s input side regardless of the input voltage see figure below We suggest the following sizes of potentiometers and associated series resistors Voltage Potentiometer Series Resistor 12V 5kQ 24 V 5kQ 6 6 KQ IDEC SmartRelay Manual 37 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring When using a potentiometer and 10 V input voltage as the maximum value you must ensure that with a connected input voltage of 24 V 14 V must release via the series resistor so that a maximum of 10 V are supplied when you turn the potentiometer one full rotation With a voltage of 12 V this can be neglected Note The FL1B J2B2 expansion module provides additional analog inputs Always use twisted and shielded cables for analog signals and keep these as short as possible Sensor connections To connect sensors to IDEC SmartRelay FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE FL1E H12SND T The inputs of these devices are not tut isolated and therefore require a common reference potential chassis ground With FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE 50060666 b0 and FL1 E H12SND modules you can 7 tap analog signals between the
186. ents the overflow bit set by the analog math instruction 1 if the error occurred 0 if not The ZD OF Err parameter represents the logical OR of the zero division bit and overflow bit of the referenced analog math instruction Q represents the output of the analog math error detection function An x indicates that the bit can be either 0 or 1 with no influence on the output Err ZD OF Q ZD 1 x ZD 0 x 0 OF x 1 1 OF x 0 0 ZD OF 1 0 1 ZD OF 0 1 1 ZD OF 1 1 1 ZD OF 0 0 0 If the MathBN parameter is null then the output Q is always 0 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 231 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Setting the Par parameter The parameters MathBN AutoRst and Err can be set in programming mode or parameter assignment mode View in programming mode example Block number of an already B 3 programmed analog math Mat hBN B001 lt instruction AutoRst N Auto Reset Y or N Err ZD OF lt ZD OF or ZD OF Use the lt and keys to navigate between the MathBN AutoRst and Err parameters To change a value use the A and W keys to scroll through value choices for each value Use the OK key to accept changes View in parameter assignment mode example B 3 Block number of an analog Mat hBN B001 lt math instruction AutoRst N lt Auto Reset Y or N Err ZD OF ZD OF or Z
187. enu three times in a row For a base module with versions 4 or later you can delete the circuit program and the password by inputting a wrong password on Clear Prg menu a hundred times in a row 3 6 14 Summertime wintertime conversion You can enable or disable automatic summertime wintertime conversion in parameter assignment mode by calling the Set menu command e in programming mode by calling the Setup menu command To enable disable automatic S W Time conversion in programming mode 1 Switch IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode 2 You are now in the main menu and want to select the Setup menu command Press A or V 3 Confirm Setup Press OK 4 Move the gt cursor to Clock Press Aor V 5 Confirm Clock Press OK 6 Move the gt cursor to S W Time Press Aor V 7 Confirm S W Time Press OK IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display gt On Off S W Time Off The current setting of automatic S W Time conversion is shown on the bottom row The default setting is Off disabled IDEC SmartRelay Manual 97 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay To enable disable automatic S W Time conversion in parameter assignment mode If you want to enable disable automatic S W Time conversion in parameter assignment mode select in the parameter assignment menu Set t
188. er Scale the analog value at the analog amplifier for further use Connect for example the time base for parameter T of a time function e g On Off delay Chapter 4 4 3 or the on and or off limit specification of an up down counter Chapter 4 4 13 to the scaled analog value For more information with programming examples refer to the online help for WindLGC Setting the Par parameter The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application View in programming mode example Gain 00300 lt _ Offset B3 A 02 50 lt 4 B p 0 _ B3 A 02 50 B 00300 AQ 00250 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Decimals in the message text View in parameter assignment mode example 189 IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 21 Latching relay Short description Input S sets output Q input R resets output Q again Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay G Input S You set output Q with a signal at input p i 7 Par Input R You reset output Q with a signal at input R If S and R 1 the output is reset Parameter Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q Q is set with a signal at input S and reset with a signal at input R Timing diagram
189. er Set 1 and state 1 corresponds to Character Set 2 If M27 0 low only message texts configured for Character Set 1 will display If M27 1 high only message texts configured for Character Set 2 will display If you do not include M27 in the circuit program message texts display in the character set that you selected from either the Msg Config menu or from WindLGC Note The output of the marker always carries the signal of the previous program cycle This value does not change within the same program cycle Shift register bits IDEC SmartRelay provides the shift register bits S1 to S8 which are assigned the read only attribute in the circuit program The content of shift register bits can only be modified by means of the Shift register special function see Chapter 4 4 25 Cursor keys Up to four cursor keys are available to you namely C A C gt C V and C lt C Cursor Cursor keys are programmed for the circuit program in the same way as other inputs You can set the cursor keys in the corresponding display while the system is in RUN see Chapter 3 6 6 and in an active message text ESC Key Cursor keys can save switches and inputs and allow operator control of the circuit program Cursor key inputs from the Text Display are identical to cursor key inputs from the IDEC SmartRelay module 112 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info
190. ermissible range 10 8 28 8 V DC Power consumption 25 50 mA Voltage failure buffering typ 5 ms Power loss at e 12V 0 3 0 6 W e 24V 0 6 1 2 W Electrical isolation No Reverse polarity protection Yes Ground terminal for connecting ground and shielding of the analog measuring line Analog inputs Number 2 Type Unipolar Input range 0 10 V DC input impedance 76 KQ or 0 20 mA input impedance lt 250 Q Resolution 10 bit normalized to 0 1000 Cycle time for analog value generation 50 ms Electrical isolation No Line length shielded and twisted 10m Encoder supply voltage none Error limit 1 5 Interference frequency suppression 55 Hz 318 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data A 11 Technical data FL1D K2B2 FL1D K2BM2 FL1D K2B2 FL1D K2BM2 Power supply Input voltage 24V DC 24V DC Permissible range 20 4 28 8 V DC 20 4 28 8 V DC Power consumption 25 50 mA 35 90 mA Voltage failure buffering typ 5 ms typ 5 ms Power loss at 24 V 0 6 1 2 W 0 9 2 2 W Electrical isolation No No Reverse polarity protection Yes Yes Ground terminal for connecting ground and shielding of the analog output line for connecting ground and shielding of the analog output line Analog outputs Number 2 2 Volta
191. es optionally use l1 for Al3 and 12 for Al4 See the graphical representation at 2 1 1 Also note that you can also use 13 14 15 and I6 as fast digital inputs The illustration above with numbered Al inputs shows the conceptual usage of the inputs not the actual physical markings on the module 58 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay s connectors The term connector refers to all connections and states in IDEC SmartRelay The digital I O status can be 0 or 1 Status 0 means that the input does not carry a specific voltage Status 1 means that the input does carry a specific voltage The hi lo and x connectors have been introduced to make it easier for you to create the circuit program hi high is assigned the status 1 lo low is assigned the status O You do not have to use all of the connectors of a block The circuit program automatically assigns the unused connectors a status that ensures proper functioning of the relevant block If you prefer to do so you can identify unused connectors with an x For information on the meaning of the term block refer to Chapter 3 2 IDEC SmartRelay has the following connectors Connectors IDEC SmartRelay base module
192. es to output Q1 and to a further circuit element A series connection corresponds with the AND block I3 Q1 x Step 2 S1 and S2 are connected in parallel A parallel circuit corresponds with the OR block gt amp me 13 I2 Q1 x x Unused inputs The circuit program automatically assigns the unused connectors a status that ensures proper functioning of the relevant block If you like you can label unused connectors with an x identifier In our example we shall use only two inputs of the OR block and two inputs of the AND block the relevant unused third and fourth inputs are identified at the connector with an x Now connect the I Os to IDEC SmartRelay Wiring Connect the switches S1 to S3 to the screw terminals of your IDEC SmartRelay e 1 to connector l1 of IDEC SmartRelay e S2 to connector 2 of IDEC SmartRelay S3 to connector 13 of IDEC SmartRelay The output of the AND block controls the relay at output Q1 The load E1 is connected to output Q1 64 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Wiring example The following figure shows you the wiring based on a 230 V AC version of IDEC SmartRelay u N JY s3 Input wiring 1 2 BF boo N lt 22 2 2 u Output wiring Sz IDE
193. eset refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Timing diagram J The bold section Trg a of the timing R diagram also a J 4 LJ appears in the i e i off delay symbol Ta expires _ eT _ L amp T IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 135 IDEC SmartRelay functions Functional description Output Q is set to hiimmediately when the input Trg changes to hi The actual time T in IDEC SmartRelay is retriggered at the 1 to 0 transition of Trg The output remains set Output Q is reset to 0 with off delay when T reaches the value configured at T T T The time T is retriggered with a one shot at input Trg You can set input R Reset to reset the time T and the output before T has expired If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure 4 4 3 On Off delay Short description The on off delay function sets the output after the set on delay time has expired and resets it upon expiration of the off delay time Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay _ Ts Inputtrg A positive edge Oto 1 transition at Trg EL G input Trg Trigger triggers the on Par JJ L delay time Ty A negative edge 1 to 0 transition at input Trg Trigger triggers the off delay time T_ Parameter Ty is the time after which the output is set hi output signal
194. ess OK The Text Display shows you the following dis play Stop Pry gt No Yes 3 Press W to move the cursor to Yes and press OK Enter the correct password in this case ZZ If you enter an incorrect password the Text Display returns to the dis play in Step 1 Password ZZ 4 Press OK to exit the password entry screen form The Text Display opens the main menu gt Setup Msg Config Start IDEC SmartRelay changes to STOP mode 82 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Note Whenever the Text Display is initialized the password needs to be inputted again The next time you start it and access this password protected function RUN to STOP you will be prompted for password entry on the Text Display When IDEC SmartRelay subsequently changes from STOP to RUN mode you will again be prompted for password entry to change IDEC SmartRelay to STOP mode from the Text Display if more than one minute has elapsed since you pressed any key on the Text Display The Text Display can also change IDEC SmartRelay from STOP to RUN mode but no password is required in this case IDEC SmartRelay Manual 83 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 6 6 84 Switching IDEC SmartRelay to RUN mode In
195. et the relevant block parameters times on off thresholds etc No Cam This input will not be connected Here you configure the time patterns e P Priority This is an open input Here you define priorities and specify whether a message is to be acknowledged in RUN 4 3 2 Time response Parameter T At some of the SFs it is possible to configure a time value T When you preset this time note that your input values are based on the timebase set Timebase z S s seconds seconds 1 109 seconds m minutes minutes seconds h hours hours minutes Setting a time T of 250 minutes B 1 t Unit in hours h T 0 4 1 0 h 04 00 hours 240 minutes 00 10 hours 10 minutes 250 minutes 122 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Accuracy of T Because of slight tolerances in the characteristics of electronic components the set time T may deviate You can find a detailed description of such deviations in the On delay topic Page 131 Accuracy of the timer Seven day Twelve month time switch To prevent timing inaccuracy of the real time clock in C versions caused by this deviation the timer value is continuously compared with a high precision timebase and corrected The resultant maximum timing inaccuracy is 5 s day 4 3 3 Backup of the real time clock Because the interna
196. exer eesesesceseseeseseeeeseneeeseeessseenseeenseeetsees 210 4 4 27 Analog Ramp Control ccecececsseeecsesceeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeseeieereeseeaeeees 212 JAg Plicontroller ioie a r E sath ahah asi 216 4 4 29 Pulse Width Modulator PWM esseere 222 IDEC SmartRelay Manual ix Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 424530 Analog Maths ics wire woaudes nei denies a 225 4 4 31 Analog math error detection cee eeseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereieereatees 230 5 Configuring IDEC SmartRelay ccseeee 233 5 1 Selecting parameter assignment MOdEC sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 5 1 1 Paramete Sustin aes aie a a a ai 235 5 1 2 Selecting the parameters 236 5 1 3 Modifying parameters ssssssessssesrsrersrrerririrrerensnrennrnrnrerenenennnea 237 5 2 Setting the default values for IDEC SmartRelay 000 239 5 2 1 Setting the time of day and date FL1E H12RC ceeeee 240 5 2 2 Setting the display contrast and backlight choice c 000 241 5 2 3 Setting the menu language ee cseceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecateeeteeateeas 243 5 2 4 Setting the number of Als in the base module ceceees 244 5 2 5 Setting the start SCrE MN eecsecceeceeeceteeeteeseeceeeeeeeecateeeeeeaneeees 245 6 IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge Card ssscssceseeeeeees 247 6 1 Security function CopyProtect ssccsscesscesessse
197. extend this distance to up to ten meters by using a standard Sub D cable together with the Text Display cable 30 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring Note The number of supplied mounting screws and brackets on the FL1E RD1 text display depends on the version The version number of the FL1E RD1 is found in the lower right corner on the back of the module For identifying the version see page 5 For versions 3 and earlier 2 screws and brackets are provided For versions 4 and later 4 screws and brackets are provided Listed by UL type 4x 12 for a tightening torque of 0 2 Nm IDEC SmartRelay Manual 31 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 3 Wiring IDEC SmartRelay Wire IDEC SmartRelay using a screwdriver with a 3 mm blade You do not need wire ferrules for the terminals You can use conductors with cross sections of up to the following thicknesses e 1x2 5mm 2 2x 1 5 mm for each second terminal chamber Tightening torque 0 4 0 5 Nm or 3 4 in lbs Recommended ferrules Ferrules order No For 1 cable connection F NIC HIFU NIC HIFU J i AWG oa aT Blade Terminals Insulated Pin Terminals yP type No type No 0 3 22 Al0 5 10WH 0 5 20 Al0 5 10WH BT1 25 10
198. f cos 0 5 to 0 7 not applicable for this module Parallel output circuit for power increase Not permitted Protection of output relay if desired Switching rate Mechanical not applicable for this module Electrical 10 Hz Ohmic load lamp load 10 Hz Inductive load 0 5 Hz 1 When FL1E H12SND or FL1B M08B1S2 are switched on signal 1 is sent to the digital outputs for about 50 microseconds Take this into account especially when using devices that react to short pulses 2 The maximum switching rate is only dependent on the switching program s cycle time 306 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data A 5 Technical data FL1B M08B1S2 Power supply FL1B M08B1S2 Input voltage 24V DC Permissible range 20 4 28 8 V DC Reverse polarity protection Yes Permissible mains frequency not applicable for this module Power consumption from 24 V DC 30 45 mA 0 3 A per output Voltage failure buffering Power loss at 24 V 0 8 1 1 W Backup of the real time clock at 25 C no clock available Accuracy of the real time clock no clock available Digital inputs Number 4 Electrical isolation No Input voltage L Signal 0 lt 5VDC Signal 1 gt 12VvDc Input current at Signal 0 lt 0 85 mA e Sig
199. f the set menu Clock menu item e in programming mode by means of the setup menu Clock menu item Time of day and date see Chapter 5 2 1 Summertime wintertime conversion see Chapter 3 6 14 Synchronization see Chapter 3 6 15 Contrast and backlight settings You can set the default values for the display contrast and backlight in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu LCD menu item in programming mode by means of the setup menu LCD menu item See Chapter 5 2 2 Menu Language You can set the language in which the IDEC SmartRelay menus will be displayed in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu Menu Lang menu item in programming mode by means of the setup menu Menu Lang menu item Number of base module Analog Inputs The IDEC SmartRelay base modules FL1E H12SND and FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE support four analog inputs Formerly they supported two You can choose whether to use two or four analog inputs on these modules e inparameter assignment mode by means of the set menu BM Al NUM menu item e in programming mode by means of the setup menu BM Al NUM menu item IDEC SmartRelay Manual 239 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay Start screen settings You can select the default setting for the start screen that displays on IDEC SmartRelay and the Text Di
200. fier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e PI controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number Timing diagram R 1 cnt UUU UUU UUU LULL Dir On Off 5 p i L Internal count StartVal_ l m value Cnt Q Functional description The internal counter increments Dir 0 or decrements Dir 1 by one count with every positive edge at input Cnt You can use input R to reset the internal count value to the start value As long as R 1 the output is also 0 and the pulses at input Cnt are not counted If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure Q is set or reset depending on the current value at Cnt and the set thresholds See the calculation rule below Calculation rule Ifthe On threshold gt Off threshold then Q 1 if Cnt gt On Q 0 if Cnt lt Off e Ifthe On threshold lt Off threshold then Q 1 if On lt Cnt lt Off 162 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Note The system scans the counter limit value cyclically Thus
201. functions 4 4 Special functions list SF 128 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com When you create your circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay you find the special function blocks in the SF list You can invert the inputs of SFs individually that is the circuit program converts a logical 1 at the input into a logical 0 a logical 0 it converts into a logical 1 An example of the program code is found in Chapter 3 6 3 The table also specifies whether the relevant function can be set retentive Rem The following SFs are available a fo Par Random generator see page 144 View in IDEC SmartRelay Name of the special function Rem Times On delay REM Try see page 131 Par a Trg Off delay REM 1 R G see page 135 Par On Off delay REM Trg EL G see Page 136 Par JJ L Tro Retentive on delay REM 1 R q see page 138 Par Interval time delay relay Pulse REM Trg q output Par see page 139 Edge iriggered interval time REM Trg L delay relay R I L z see page 140 Far Asynchronous pulse REM Er generator Iriy Lu a see Page 142 Par IL ITL IDEC SmartRelay Manual IDEC SmartRelay functions View in IDEC SmartRelay Name of the special function Rem Stairwell Light Switch REM Try see page 146 Par T LP Tru Dual function switch REM
202. fy the circuit program or create an additional one without deleting the first you must archive it somewhere You can copy the IDEC SmartRelay circuit program to an IDEC SmartRelay Memory cartridge or IDEC SmartRelay Memory Battery cartridge You can then insert this cartridge in another IDEC SmartRelay in order to copy the circuit program This enables you to manage your programs in the following ways e Archive circuit programs e Reproduce circuit programs IDEC SmartRelay Manual 247 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card e Send circuit programs by mail e Write and test your circuit program at the office and then transfer it to an IDEC SmartRelay in the switching cabinet IDEC SmartRelay is supplied with a hood The IDEC SmartRelay Memory cartridge IDEC SmartRelay Battery cartridge and IDEC SmartRelay Memory Battery cartridge are supplied separately Note You do not need a memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge to backup the circuit program in your IDEC SmartRelay The IDEC SmartRelay circuit program is automatically stored in nonvolatile memory when you exit the programming mode The memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge can backup all data in the IDEC SmartRelay circuit program memory The order numbers are found in the appendix 248 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax
203. g e Ki contactor relay R Y1 solenoid valve e S1 normally open contact pressure switch e S2 normally open contact float switch e S3 normally closed contact float switch e 4 normally closed contact float switch IDEC SmartRelay Manual 295 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Block diagram of the IDEC SmartRelay solution Pressure switch T 20s Float switch for dry run protection OFF 13 1 Float switch for dry run protection ON 14 Float switch for drin king water 13 supply ON Drinking water supply line Q2 Float switch for drinking water supply OFF 12 8 7 4 Special features and expansions The block diagram shows how you can interconnect the pump controls and the solenoid valve The layout corresponds with the circuit diagram You also have the option to integrate further functions for specific applications which can only be implemented in a conventional circuitry by adding further switchgear e g Enabling the pump at specific times e Indication of imminent or existing water shortage e Reporting of system faults 296 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data A 1 General technical data Criterion IDEC SmartRelay Base Dimensions WxHxD Weight Installation Tested in accordance with Values 72 x 90x55 mm
204. ge range 0 10 VDC 0 10V DC Voltage load gt 5kQ gt 5kQ Current output 0 4 20 mA Current load lt 2500 Resolution 10 bit normalized to 0 1000 10 bit normalized to 0 1000 Cycle time for analog output depending on installation typ 50 ms depending on installation typ 50 ms Electrical isolation No No Line length shielded and 10m 10m twisted Error limit Voltage output Voltage output 2 5 at full scale 2 5 at full scale Current output 3 at full scale Short circuit protection Yes Yes Response at short circuit 1 Overload protection Yes Yes Response at overload 1 Voltage output If short circuit protection or overcurrent protection is activated for a voltage output the error limit of the other voltage is not ensured IDEC SmartRelay Manual 319 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data A 12 Technical data Text Display Text Display Mechanical data Dimensions WxHxD 128 2 x 86 x 38 7 mm Weight Approx 220 g Installation Bracket mounting Keyboard Membrane keypad with 10 keys Display FSTN Graphic Display with 128 x 64 columns x rows LED backlight Power supply Input voltage 24 V AC DC 12VDC Permissible range 20 4 26 4 V AC 10 2 28 8 VDC Permissible mains frequency 47 63 Hz Power c
205. gt Card 254 Memory battery cartridge 247 Menu language 243 Menu structure IDEC SmartRelay 329 Text Display 331 Message text charset flag 112 Message texts 193 character set 193 Message ticking 198 Mode parameter assignment 68 234 338 PC IDEC SmartRelay 261 Programming 68 Mounting DIN rail mounting 26 Drilling template 29 Text Display 30 Wall mounting 29 N Name 77 NAND 116 Negation 120 of a BF input 114 of an input 75 of an SF input 128 Networking AS interface bus 49 NOR 119 NOT 120 NOT OR 119 Number of Als 244 O Off delay 135 Offset 125 Off time 152 On Off delay 136 On delay 131 retentive 138 On time 152 Open connectors 113 Operating characteristics 326 Status indication 326 Operating hours counter 164 Reading the MN and OT values 166 Operating mode Changing the operating mode 66 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Index Programming mode 69 OR 118 Order numbers 333 Outputs 110 Analog outputs 111 blank 58 111 connecting 44 Digital outputs 110 Overflow error 230 P Parameter 235 Inputs 122 selecting 236 Set Param 235 setting 233 T 122 Parameter assignment 89 Parameter assignment menu 234 Parameter assignment screen form 152 198 Parameter protection 124 Parameters modifying 237 parameters showing hiding 90 Password assigning 78 changing 80 deactivating 80 wrong 81 PC cab
206. gt keys Now press the lt key The cursor moves to the left The cursor indicates your current position in the circuit program Q1 At this point you enter only the first OR block Press OK to select editing mode The cursor is displayed as a solid square You can now select a connector i Co Q1 or a block The cursor no longer appears in the form of an underscore but instead as a flashing solid square IDEC SmartRelay offers you various options here Select GF basic functions by pressing the key until GF appears and confirm with OK IDEC SmartRelay now shows the first block from the list of basic functions B1 The AND is the first block of the basic functions list The solid square cursor prompts you to select a block IDEC SmartRelay Manual Programming IDEC SmartRelay Now press or A until the OR block appears on the display Bl The solid square cursor is still positioned on the block Press OK to confirm your entries and exit the dialog The display now shows Your complete circuit program layout Bl Block B1 3 number gt 1 Q1 ai You have now entered the first block Each new block is automatically assigned a block number The only thing left to do is interconnect the block inputs This is how it is done Press OK The display now shows Bl Q1 Select the Co list Press OK The display now shows B1
207. gt y 5 00000 4 8 00000 4 2 01000 4 1 0123456789 lt 4 b 6 00005 201234567 v Analog inputs Analog inputs Analog outputs Memory Markers Cursor keys ESC P Stop Set Param Parameter assignment menu Set Pig Name 330 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay menu structure D 2 Text Display Menu overview No Program pSetup Msg Config Start Circuit program is busy RUN See Main menu gt Stop Mo 09 00 HE Set Param Parameter setting Chapter 5 1 1 cont 2008 05 26 Msg Config Message text global settings See Main menu and section 4 4 23 Set Default values setting Chapter 5 2 cont See Start menu Parameter assignment menu Main menu ESC gt Stop See Setup menu pSetup gt Clock Configure global parameters for message texts Msg Config LCD p gt Chapter 4 4 23 Start Menu Lang analea Time Char Sets r mp none See Start menu CurrCharSet 2008 05 26 Setup menu ESC gt Stop gt Setup gt Clock ppSet Clock Setting the time date Chapter 5 2 1 v gt S W Ti me Setting the summertime wintertime Chapter 3 7 14 v Syne Cannot be used Do MEN O o Setting the display contrast Chapter 5 2 2 gt BackLight Setting th
208. h unshielded 100 m Digital outputs Number 4 Output type Relay outputs Electrical isolation Yes Dielectric Strength between power input terminals and output terminals 2 500 V AC 1 minute 500 V DC 1 minute In groups of 1 312 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay Manual Technical data FL1B M08D2R2 Control of a digital input Yes Continuous current li max 5 A per relay Surge current max 30A Incandescent lamp load 25000 switching 1000 W cycles at Fluorescent tubes with ballast 25000 10x58 W switching cycles Fluorescent tubes conventionally 1x58 W compensated 25000 switching cycles Fluorescent tubes uncompensated 10x58 W 25000 switching cycles Derating none across the entire temperature range Short circuit proof cos 1 Power protection B16 600A Short circuit proof cos 0 5 to 0 7 Power protection B16 900A Parallel output circuits for power increase Not permitted Protection of output relay if desired max 16 A characteristic B16 Minimum Switching Load 10 mA 12 V DC Initial Contact Resistance 100 mQ maximum at 1A 24V DC Mechanical Life 10 000 000 operations minimum no load 10 Hz Electrical Life 100 000 operations minimum rated resistive load 1800 operations hour Switching rate Mechanical 10 Hz Ohmic load lamp load 2 H
209. han one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage IDEC SmartRelay Manual i Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Qualified Personnel The device system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation Commissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notices in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage ZN Note the following Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by IDEC Correct reliable operation of the product requires proper transport storage positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance Copyright IDEC CORPORATION All rights reserved The reproduction distribution or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority Offenders will be liable for
210. he unused inputs with an x Enter the x character twice 1 Switch to editing mode Press OK 2 Select the Co list Press Vor A 3 Accept the Co list Press OK 4 Select x Press Vor A 5 Apply x Press OK The display now shows This is the layout of your circuit program B1 i gt 1 Bl Q1 I2 Q1 x Note You can invert individual inputs of the basic and special functions that is if an input carries a logical 1 signal the circuit program will output a logical 0 On the other hand a logical 0 is inverted into a logical 1 signal To invert an input move the cursor to the relevant position e g I1 I2 I3 x Confirm with OK Now press or A to invert this input IDEC SmartRelay Manual 75 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 76 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Next press ESC Your circuit program layout Bl I1 B1 I2 71 a ai I3 Q1 I3 Q1 x x You can review your first circuit program by pressing lt or gt to move the cursor through the circuit program We shall now exit circuit programming mode This is how it is done Return to the programming menu Press ESC Note IDEC SmartRelay has now saved your circuit program to nonvolatile memory The circuit program remains in the IDEC
211. hen menus Clock and S W Time You can now enable disable automatic S W Time conversion Enabling summertime wintertime conversion You now want to enable this conversion and define or set its parameters 1 Move the gt cursor to On Press Aor Y 2 Confirm On Press OK The display shows EU 3 Select the desired conversion Press Aor V What is shown on the display e EU represents the start and end of European summertime e UK represents the start and end of summertime in the United Kingdom e US1 represents the start and end of daylight saving time summertime in the United States prior to 2007 e US2 represents the start and end of daylight saving time summertime in the United States in 2007 and later years e AUS represents the start and end of Australian summertime e AUS TAS represents the start and end of Australian Tasmanian summertime e NZ represents the start and end of New Zealand summertime e Here you can enter any month day and time zone difference 98 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay The table below lists the preset conversions Start of summertime End of summertime Time zone difference A EU Last Sunday in March Last Sunday in October 60 Min 02 00 gt 03 00 03
212. hone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 195 IDEC SmartRelay functions Message Text Function Block Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input En A Oto 1 transition at input En Enable a starts the output of the message text Par Input P P Priority of the message text Range of values 0 127 Message destination Message tick settings Ack Acknowledgment of the message text Parameter Text Input of the message text Par Parameter or actual value of another already programmed function see Visible parameters or process variables Time Display of the continuously updated time of day Date Display of the continuously updated date EnTime Display of the time of the 0 to 1 transition of the signal at input En EnDate Display of the date of the 0 to 1 transition of the signal at input En I O status names Display of a digital input or output status name for example On or Off Analog Input Display of an analog input value to be shown in message text and updated according to the analog time Note You can only edit the Text parameter of the message from the IDEC SmartRelay base module ISO8859 1 is the only available character set for editing text You can edit all other parameters and other languages for the Text parameter from WindLGC See the online help for configuration details Output Q Q remains set as long as the message text
213. hown in the bottom line This function is disabled by default No disabled Enabling the security function To set the security function 1 Move the gt cursor to Yes Press Aor V 2 Confirm Yes Press OK IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display gt No Yes CopyProtect Yes Note This only generates a circuit program and copy protection for the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge the circuit program itself must be copied separately from IDEC SmartRelay to the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge This copy can be done at power on See chapter 6 4 You can always change the No status security function disabled to Yes security function enabled A status change from Yes security function enabled to No security function disabled is only possible if the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge does not contain a circuit program IDEC SmartRelay Manual 251 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card 6 2 Inserting and removing memory and battery cartridges When you remove a memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge that contains a circuit program with copy protection attributes note the following The circuit program stored on the cartridge can only be executed if the cartridge remains inserted during
214. ide by 0 or overflow occurs and 32768 if a negative overflow underflow occurs IDEC SmartRelay Manual 225 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameters V1 V4 The analog values for the parameters V1 V4 can be derived from another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 e Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 e Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 e Analog multiplexer actual value AQ e Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 e Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 e Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number For information on parameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Note If the analog value for parameter V1 V2 V3 or V4 is derived from another already programmed function whose actual value exceeds the value range for V1 V4 IDEC SmartRelay will display the limit value 32768 if the value is less than the lower range or 32767 if the value is greater than the upper range Parameters p number of decimals Parameter p applies only to the display of Value1 Value2 Value3 Value4 and AQ in a message text IDEC SmartRelay
215. ient memory space by not allowing you to add a further block to your circuit program IDEC SmartRelay offers you only the blocks for which it can provide sufficient memory space If IDEC SmartRelay memory space is insufficient to hold any further blocks you select from a block list the system will deny access to this list If memory space is fully occupied optimize your circuit program or install a second IDEC SmartRelay Calculating memory requirements When calculating the memory requirements of a circuit you must always take into account all individual areas of memory 106 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Example Bytes REM Al Bytes REM No 1 The sample circuit program contains Memory area Block no Function Bytes Blocks REM B1 OR 12 1 B2 AND 12 1 B3 Seven day time switch 20 1 B4 On delay 8 1 3 B5 Stairwell Light Switch 12 1 0 B6 AND 12 1 Resources used by the circuit 76 6 3 program Memory space limits in IDEC Smart 3800 200 250 Relay Still available in IDEC SmartRelay 3724 194 247 Configured with retentivity This means that this circuit program fits in IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr co
216. if the pulse frequency at the fast inputs 13 14 15 or I6 is faster than the cycle time the special function might not switch until after the specified limit value is exceeded Example Up to 100 pulses per cycle can be counted 900 pulses have been counted so far On 950 Off 10000 The output is set in the next cycle after the value has reached 1000 The output would not be set at all if the value Off 980 View in programming mode example B3 1 R B3 1 R On 001234 or On 123456 Of f 000000 Of f B021 To set the start value press A or W to access the following screen form B3 2 R STV 0100 If the referenced block B021 in the example returns a value that lies out of the valid range the value is rounded to the next valid value The view in parameter assignment mode example B3 B3 On 001234 or On 123456 Of f 000000 Of f B021 Cnt 000120 Suret Cnt 000120 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 163 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 14 Operating hours counter Short description A configured time is triggered with a signal at the monitoring input The output is set when this time has expired Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay R Input R A positive edge 0 to 1 transition at En Th input R resets output Q and sets a Ral 4T d configured value MI at the
217. igital 4 relays no display unit Ta 10A no keyboard i FL1E B12RCA 24VAC 8 digital 4 relays no display unit 24V DC 10A no keyboard FL1E B12RCC 100 240V 8 digital 4 relays no display unit AC DC 10A no keyboard 1 Of those can be used alternatively 4 analog inputs 0 10V and 4 fast inputs 2 AC versions Two groups consisting of 4 inputs each Each input within a group must be connected to the same phase It is possible to interconnect groups with a different phase 3 The digital inputs can be operated with P or N action 12 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Expansion modules The following expansion modules can be connected to IDEC SmartRelay Name Power supply Inputs Outputs FL1B MO8B2R2 12 24VDC 4 digital 4 relays 5A FL1B M08B1S2 24V DC 4 digital 4 solid state 24V 0 3A FL1B MO8D2R2 24V AC DC 4 digital 4 relays 5A FL1B MO08C2R2 100 240V 4digital 4 relays 5A AC DC FL1B J2B2 12 24VDC 2 analog none iar 0 10V or 0 20mA FL1D K2B2 24 V DC none 2 analog 0 10 VDC FL1D K2BM2 24V DC none 2 analog 0 10 V DC 0 4 20 mA ouvoyg 1 2 3 4 Communication modules ifferent phases are not allowed within the inputs 10 V 0 20 mA can be connecte
218. ilable Digital inputs Number 8 Electrical isolation No High speed inputs 4 I3 14 15 16 Input frequency e Normal input max 4 Hz e High speed input e max 5 kHz Input voltage L e Signal 0 lt 5VDC e Signal 1 gt 12VDC Input current at e Signal 0 lt 0 85 mA I3 16 lt 0 05 mA 1 12 17 18 e Signal 1 gt 2 A 13 16 gt 0 15 mA It 12 17 18 Delay time at e Otol typ 1 5 ms lt 1 0 ms I3 16 e 1to0 typ 1 5 ms lt 1 0 ms I3 16 Line length unshielded 100 m Analog inputs Number 4 I1 AIl3 12 Al4 I7 Al1 I8 Al2 Range 0 10 V DC input impedance 72 KQ Cycle time for analog value generation 300 ms max input voltage 28 8 V IDEC SmartRelay Manual 305 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data Line length shielded and twisted FL1E H12SND 10m Error limit 1 5 at full scale Digital outputs Number 4 Output type Transistor current sourcing Electrical isolation No In groups of Control of a digital input Yes Output voltage A Supply voltage Output current max 0 3 A Short circuit proof and overload proof Yes Short circuit current limitation Approx 1 A Derating none across the entire temperature range Short circuit proof cos 1 not applicable for this module Short circuit proo
219. illing template for wall mounting 4 Before you can wall mount IDEC SmartRelay you need to drill holes using the template shown below 0 2 0 2 53 5 0 0 35 5 0 0 x gt i PEI 7 APE S ee I S 4 o lo id em e k 0 2 n x 35 5 0 0 All dimensions in mm Bore hole for M4 screw tightening torque 0 8 to 1 2 Nm 1 IDEC SmartRelay base module 2 IDEC SmartRelay expansion modules IDEC SmartRelay Manual 29 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 2 3 Mounting the Text Display To prepare the mounting surface for the optional Text Display and mount it follow these steps 1 Cuta 119 5 mm x 78 5 mm hole in the mounting surface 119 5 0 5mm lt 4 gt 78 5 0 5mm 2 Place the included gasket on the frontplate of the Text Display 3 Fit the Text Display into the cutout you made in the mounting surface 4 Attach the mounting brackets included to the Text Display 5 Tighten the mounting screws on the mounting brackets to 0 15 0 2 Nm torque to secure the Text Display a Mounting brackets ee ea Mounting screws Gasket gt p t Cabinet door or con w cis o sh 7 You can then use the included cable to connect the Text Display to the IDEC SmartRelay base module up to a distance of 2 5 meters You can
220. in any of the following parameters e Par e Time Date e EnTime e EnDate You can only edit such message texts from WindLGC Changing parameters in the active message text When the message text is active press ESC to select the editing mode Note You must keep the ESC key pressed for at least one second Press lt and to select the relevant parameter Press OK to change the parameter Use the A and W keys to edit a parameter Confirm your changes with OK You can now edit further parameters in the message text if any exist Press ESC to exit editing mode IDEC SmartRelay Manual 203 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Key input simulation in the active message text You can enable the four cursor keys C A C C Wand C lt 4 in an active message text by pressing ESC plus the relevant cursor key Setting the Par parameter View in programming mode Parameter assignment screen form for Par Press gt to select a line for the message text Press A and to select the letter to be displayed in the text To move the cursor from one position to the other press lt and gt The list of available characters is the same as for the circuit program name The character set is found in Chapter 3 6 4 When you enter message text from the IDEC SmartRelay base module you can only enter characters from the ISO885
221. ion e Confirm your entries with OK IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com L means The parameter is shown and can be modified in the parameter assignment mode R means Retentivity is enabled for this block 89 Programming IDEC SmartRelay Seiting the time Set the time T 12 00 minutes 1 Move the cursor to the first digit Press lt or gt 2 Select the digit 1 Press Aor V 3 Shift the cursor to the second digit Press lt or gt 4 Select digit 2 Press Aor V 5 Move the cursor to the unit Press lt or gt 6 Select the timebase m for minutes Press Aor V Showing hiding parameters the parameter protection mode If you want to show hide the parameter and allow prevent its modification in parameter assignment mode 1 Move the cursor to the protection mode Press lt or gt 2 Select the protection mode Press Aor V The display should now show B2 GR B2 CR T 12 00m or T 12 00m Protection mode The value Protection mode The of the time T can be modified in value of the time T is parameter assignment mode hidden in parameter assignment mode 3 Confirm your entries with OK Enabling disabling retentivity To decide whether you want to retain your current data after a power failure or not 1 Move the cursor to the retentivity setting Press lt or g
222. ion with FL1E H12RCC ecen 273 8 3 Air conditioning System ssssssesesesueununnnnnnenununununununnnnnnnnunennnnnnnn 276 8 3 1 Requirements for an air conditioning System 276 8 3 2 Advantages of using IDEC SmartRelay ccccccseeeeeeeeeee 279 8 4 Factory dOOF no ee ceceeceseecenee sense senseeeeseneeseeeseeesaeeesaeee seen seen seneesneaees 281 8 4 1 Requirements for a gate Control system te eeeeeteteeteeeeeeees 281 8 4 2 Previous solution ese ceceeceeeeetceceeeeeeceecaeeeeseecaecaeeeeeaeeaseeeeeeeatees 282 8 4 3 Extended IDEC SmartRelay solution 284 8 5 Centralized control and monitoring of several factory doors 285 8 5 1 Requirements for a gate Control system eeceeeteeeeteeeeeeees 286 8 6 LUM NOUS LOWS ceseeceseeceneeeeneteeneeneeeeen seen seen seen seen seen sonensneeaees 289 8 6 1 Requirements for a lighting system sses 289 8 6 2 Previous solution ee ceceeceeeceteeceeeeeeceeceeceeeaecaesaeeeseaeeaeeeteeeaeaes 290 8 6 3 Luminous row control system with FL1E H12RCC ce 291 8 7 Service Water PUMP sscesssesstsiesseesesseesesceeseesesteesseeenseaeeananaeeeeanes 293 8 7 1 Requirements for a control system of a service water pump 294 8 7 2 PrevioUS SOlUTON oss d endian ate an Gaede dda 294 8 7 3 Service water pump system with FL1E H12RCC cee 295 8 7 4 Special features and expansions cceccceeceeeceeteeeteetteeeteeees 296 A Technical Gata
223. isplay It includes four programmable cursor keys four programmable function keys and an ESC and OK key You use the included Text Display cable to connect from the communication interface on the right side of the Text Display to the corresponding interface on the left side of the IDEC SmartRelay base module How to identify the IDEC SmartRelay The IDEC SmartRelay identifier informs you of various properties Base module FL1E O O O B Base module without display H Base module with display Number of Inputs and Outputs R Relay output S Tr Source output C With clock N Without clock D 24V DC E 12 24V DC A 24V AC DC B 100 240V AC C 100 240V AC DC IDEC SmartRelay Manual 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Expansion module Digital module FL1B MO Number of Inputs and Outputs B1 24V DC B2 12 24V DC C2 100 240V AC DC D2 24V AC DC S Tr Source output R Relay output Terminal type 2 non removable terminal Analog input module FL1B JO Number of Inputs Resolution B 10bit Terminal type 2 non removable terminal Analog output module FL1D KO Number of Outputs Resolution B 10bit blank 0 10V M 0 10V 0 4 20 mA Terminal type 2 non removable terminal Communication module FL1B O O C Communication module AS AS Interface
224. it a name and if desired a password In this section we will show you how to modify existing circuit programs and how to use the special functions Using this second circuit program we will show you how to e Add a block to an existing circuit program e Select a block for a special function e Assign parameters Modifying circuits We shall use the first circuit program as a basis for the second with some slight modifications First of all take a look at the circuit diagram for the second circuit program L1 i T You already know the first part of the circuit S1 and S2 switch a st S2 Si relay which is to be used to switch on the load E1 and to switch off the load with a delay of Ki i E1 42 minutes N gt 86 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay This is the circuit program layout in IDEC SmartRelay Il gt 1 TI I2 x x nage This is the new block Q1 Par You can see the OR block and the output relay Q1 we have already used in the first circuit program The only difference is the new off delay block Editing the circuit program Switch IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode As a reminder 1 Switch IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode in RUN Press ESC to enter the parameter assignment mode Select the Stop command c
225. l real time clock of an IDEC SmartRelay is backed up it continues operation after a power failure The ambient temperature influences the backup time At an ambient temperature of 25 C the typical backup time is 80 hours If there is a power outage of an IDEC SmartRelay for more than 80 hours the internal clock responds as shown below On restarting the clock is set to Sunday 00 00 1 January The time is stopped and flashes IDEC SmartRelay is back in the status that it was in before the power outage In the RUN status the system processes the counters that were parameterized with the time above The clock is however still stopped e Equipment series FL1E If you are using the optional IDEC SmartRelay Battery cartridge or combined IDEC SmartRelay Memory Battery cartridge IDEC SmartRelay can retain the clock time for up to two years These cartridges are available for equipment series FL1E To backup the real time clock for more than 80 hours insert a battery cartridge or a combined memory battery cartridge to the base module 4 3 4 Retentivity The switching states counter and time values of many SFs can be set retentive This means that current data are retained after a power failure and that the block resumes operation at the break point The timer is not reset but IDEC SmartRelay Manual 123 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 3 5
226. le 261 USB 261 PC IDEC SmartRelay 261 PI controller 216 Planning 67 Power on off 51 Power supply Text Display 34 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Program cycle 321 Program memory 103 Program module card copying 256 Enabling the security function 251 inserting 252 253 removing 252 253 Security function 250 Program name change 77 character set 77 read 235 Programming menu AQ in Stop 94 AQ type 95 Clear Prg 96 Edit Name 77 Edit Prg 70 Password 78 Programs modifying 86 Protection mode 90 Pulse Pause 141 width 141 pulse generator Asynchronous 142 Pulse output 139 Pulse Width Modulator PWM 222 PWM 222 R Random generator 144 Recycling 15 Relay outputs 44 317 service life 317 switching capacity 317 Removal 28 339 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Index Resources 105 Retentive memory 103 Retentive on delay 138 Retentivity 123 enabling disabling Retentivity setting 90 Rules four golden 66 RUN mode 84 S Sensor Characteristics 35 Sensor connections 38 Set clock 240 Setting Default values 239 Display contrast 241 243 244 Start screen 245 time 90 Time of day and date 240 Setting the date 239 240 Setting the time of day 240 Settings 235 Setup 20 Maximum setup 20 with different voltage classes 22 Seven day time switch 150 153 Examples 153 setting 153 SF 109 128 SFs Delay On 131 Shift register 208 Shift register bits 112 Sho
227. lowed exactly Incorrect handling can render measures intended to prevent dangerous faults ineffective or generate additional sources of danger IDEC SmartRelay Manual 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 1 Modular IDEC SmartRelay setup 2 1 1 Maximum setup As defined in Chapter 1 IDEC SmartRelay supports a maximum of 24 digital inputs 8 analog inputs 16 digital outputs and 2 analog outputs You can achieve the maximum setup in different ways as shown below Maximum setup of an IDEC SmartRelay with analog inputs four in use FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1E H12SND IDEC SmartRelay base module 4 digital modules 2 analog modules and 1 analog output module example H 12 13 16 17 18 19 12 13 16 117 120 121 124 AI3 Ald AN Al2 AIS Al6 AI7 Al8 IDEC Smart Relay FLIBMO08 FLIBMOs F1BM08 FLIBMos F1BJ2B2 F1BJ2B2 base module Q1 Q4 Q5 08 Q9 Q12 Q13 Q16 Maximum setup of an IDEC SmartRelay with analog inputs two in use FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1E H12SND IDEC SmartRelay base module 4 digital modules 3 analog modules and 1 analog output module example n 12 13 16 17 18 19 12 13 16 117 120 Ali Al2 IDEC SmartPRelay FLIB Mos FL1BM08 F1BM08 base module Q1 04 08 Q9 Q12 Q13 Q16 Maximum setup of an IDEC SmartRelay without analog inputs FL1E H12R
228. m Email info clrwtr com 107 Programming IDEC SmartRelay Indication of available memory space IDEC SmartRelay shows you the amount of free memory space Proceed as follows 1 Switch IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode as a reminder refer to page 66 2 Select Edit Press Aor V 3 Accept Edit Press OK 4 Select Memory Press Aor V 5 Accept Memory Press OK The display now shows Free Memory Byte 3724 Block 194 Rem 247 108 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Organization IDEC SmartRelay provides you with various elements in programming mode which are organized in the following lists e Co Connector list Connector see Chapter 4 1 e GF List of the basic functions AND OR refer to Chapter 4 2 SF List of the special functions refer to Chapter 4 4 e BN List of reusable blocks configured in the circuit program List contents All lists show the elements available in IDEC SmartRelay Usually this includes all connectors basic functions and special functions The 4BN list shows all the blocks that you have created in IDEC SmartRelay If not all is shown IDEC SmartRelay does not show all elements if e No further blocks may be added This is either an indication of insufficient memory space or that the maximum number of blocks has been reached e A
229. matic stairwell light switch or the current impulse relay You can also implement both functions timed off delay and Current impulse relay in a single unit What is more you can incorporate extra functions without making any alterations to the wiring Here are some examples e Current impulse relay with IDEC SmartRelay e Automatic stairwell light switch with IDEC SmartRelay e Dual function switch with IDEC SmartRelay Switch light on Switch on permanent lighting Switch light off 266 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Wiring of a lighting system with FL1E H12RCC am Q Q Switches B 4 L The external wiring of a lighting system with an IDEC SmartRelay is no different than it is for a conventional stairway and corridor lighting system Only the automatic stairwell light switch current impulse relay is replaced Supplementary functions are entered directly in IDEC SmartRelay Current impulse relay with IDEC SmartRelay Switch 11 JUL x Q1 Lamps Output Q1 is toggled with a pulse signal at input 11 Automatic stairwell light switch with IDEC SmartRelay Momentary r1 L Switch T IL Q1 06 00m Lights Output Q1 is set for the duration of 6 minutes with a pulse signal at input 11 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 267 Phone 800
230. max 16 A characteristic B16 Minimum Switching Load 10 mA 12 V DC Initial Contact Resistance 100 mQ maximum at 1A 24V DC Mechanical Life 10 000 000 operations minimum no load 10 Hz IDEC SmartRelay Manual 303 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data FL1B M08C2R2 Electrical Life 100 000 operations minimum rated resistive load 1800 operations hour Switching rate Mechanical 10 Hz Ohmic load lamp load 2 Hz Inductive load 0 5 Hz Notice For fluorescent lamps with capacitors the technical data of fluorescent lamp ballasts must also be considered If the maximum allowed surge current is exceeded fluorescent lamps must be switched with appropriate contactor relays 304 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data A 4 Technical data FL1E H12SND Power supply FL1E H12SND Input voltage 24V DC Permissible range 20 4 28 8 V DC Reverse polarity protection Yes Permissible mains frequency not applicable for this module Power consumption from 24 V DC 40 75 mA 0 3 A per output Inrush current 7 8 A at 24 V DC Voltage failure buffering Power loss at 24 V 1 0 1 8W Backup of the real time clock at 25 C no clock available Accuracy of the real time clock no clock ava
231. means of the Card menu For information on the replacement of a memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge also note Chapter 6 2 To copy a program from the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge to IDEC SmartRelay 1 Insert the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge 2 Switch IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode ESC gt Stop gt Program Card Setup Start 3 Move the gt cursor to Card Press Aor V 4 Press OK The transfer menu opens IDEC SmartRelay Manual 257 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card 5 Move the gt cursor to Card gt IDEC SmartRelay Press Aor V me Card gt Card m4 m DEC CopyProtect SmartRelay 6 Press OK IDEC SmartRelay copies the circuit program from the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge to IDEC SmartRelay If the memory cartridge is from an incompatible FL1A FL1B version IDEC SmartRelay displays this message Unknown Card Press ESC When IDEC SmartRelay has finished copying it automatically returns to the main menu 258 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay software WindLGC is available as a programming package for the PC This software provides many features fo
232. mp Eae ele FE ea eps N lt gt J EI I A o EE a Ee Let us assume you want to name your circuit program ABC 5 Select A Press V 6 Move to the next letter Press gt 7 Select B Press V 8 Move to the next letter Press gt 9 Select C Press V 10 Confirm the complete name Press OK Your circuit program is now named ABC and you are returned to the programming menu To change the name of your circuit program proceed in the same way Note You can change the name of the circuit program only in programming mode You can read the name both in programming and in parameter assignment mode IDEC SmartRelay Manual 77 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 6 5 Password You can protect a circuit program from unauthorized access by assigning it a password You can only assign or deactivate a password from the IDEC SmartRelay Base module or from WindLGC You can only change a password from the IDEC SmartRelay Base module If you have assigned a password and are using a Text Display version 4 or later together with an IDEC SmartRelay Base module version 4 or later you must enter this password if you want to change IDEC SmartRelay from RUN mode to STOP mode from the Text Display You can not stop the execution of the circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay from the Text Display without entering the password
233. multaneously turned on 1 2 n o2 a wef G u u et aa G o Dom amp iu 260 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay software 7 1 Connecting IDEC SmartRelay to a PC Connecting the PC cable To connect IDEC SmartRelay to a PC you need the IDEC SmartRelay PC cable Appendix E lists the order number Turn the power off to the IDEC SmartRelay base module Remove the cap memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge from your IDEC SmartRelay and connect the cable to this socket Connect the other end of the cable to the serial port of your PC Connecting the USB PC cable You can also connect IDEC SmartRelay to the PC with the IDEC SmartRelay USB PC cable Appendix E lists the order number Remove the cap or memory cartridge battery cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge from your IDEC SmartRelay and connect the cable to this socket Connect the other end of the cable to a USB port of your PC Switching IDEC SmartRelay to PC lt gt IDEC SmartRelay mode Switch the IDEC SmartRelay with without display to STOP from your PC refer to the WindLGC online help or select the ESC gt Stop command on a device with display and confirm the entry with Yes When IDEC SmartRelay is in STOP and online with the PC the following PC commands are accepted e Switch IDEC SmartRelay to RUN e Read write the ci
234. n the connecting wire from the analog valuator device to the analog FL1B J2B2 expansion module encoder wire that has either been mounted incorrectly or not at all To avoid fluctuating analog values when using these expansion modules proceed as follows e Use only shielded encoder wires e Shorten the encoder wire as much as possible The encoder wire must not be more than 10 meters long e Clamp the encoder wire on one side only and clamp it only to the PE terminal on the FL1B J2B2 FL1D K2B2 FL1D K2BM2 expansion module Connect ground on the encoder supply to the PE terminal on the expansion module IDEC SmartRelay Manual 43 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 3 4 Connecting outputs FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE The FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE version is equipped with relay outputs The potential of the relay contacts is isolated from the power supply and the inputs Requirements for relay outputs You can connect various loads to the outputs e g lamps fluorescent lamps motors contactor relays etc For information on the properties required for the loads connected to FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE refer to Appendix A Connecting This is how you connect the loa
235. nal 1 gt 2mA Delay time at e Otol typ 1 5 ms e 1to0 typ 1 5 ms Line length unshielded 100 m Digital outputs Number 4 Output type Transistor current sourcing 4 Electrical isolation No In groups of Control of a digital input Yes Output voltage A Supply voltage Output current max 0 3 A Short circuit proof and overload proof Yes Short circuit current limitation Approx 1 A Derating none across the entire temperature range IDEC SmartRelay Manual 307 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data FL1B M08B1S2 Short circuit proof cos 1 not applicable for this module Short circuit proof cos 0 5 to 0 7 not applicable for this module Parallel output circuit for power increase Not permitted Protection of output relay if desired Switching rate Mechanical Electrical 10 Hz Ohmic load lamp load 10 Hz Inductive load 0 5 Hz 1 8 V DC Version 1 to 4 specifications 2 1 0 mA Version 1 to 4 specifications 3 1 5 mA Version 1 to 4 specifications 4 When FL1E H12SND or FL1B M08B1S2 are switched on signal 1 is sent to the digital outputs for about 50 microseconds Take this into account especially when using devices that react to short pulses 308 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
236. nd AQ2 e Memory Markers M1 to M27 M8 Startup marker M25 Backlight flag IDEC SmartRelay Display M26 Backlight flag Text Display M27 Message text character set flag e Analog Memory Markers AM1 to AM6 e Shift register bits S1 to S8 e 4cursor keys e 16 blank outputs X1 to X16 4 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay The IDEC SmartRelay structure Q ao gt x Sa or cr Sw e TT at os Wu nag e g FL1B M08C2R2 IDEC SmartRelay expansion module 53 4 Power supply 5 Control panel 9 Mechanical coding not for FL1E pins B12 2 Inputs 6 LCD AO Mechanical coding not for FL1E sockets B12 3 Outputs 7 RUN STOP A Slide indicator 4 Module slot Expansion Text Display with cap interface cable connector 43 Version number example x represents Version 1 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay oO Be nO gt x wo TA cr gu OL SEE uo nag e g FL1B M08B2R2 IDEC SmartRelay expansion module 4 Power supply 5 Control panel Mechanical coding not for FL1E pins B12 2 Inputs 6 LCD Mechanical coding not for FL1E sockets B12 3 Outputs 7 RUN STOP 4 Slide indicator 4 Module slot Ex
237. nd line and press Aor VW to choose between No and Yes for line 2 From the last line press to go to the screen from for lines 3 and 4 Configure line ticking for lines 3 and 4 in the same way as for lines 1 and 2 B33 5 3 No a Tick settings B No Line does not tick 4 N 0 Yes Line does tick 9 Press OK to confirm the complete message text configuration Visible parameters or process variables The following parameters or process variables can be displayed in a message text as either numerical values or bar graph representations of values IDEC SmartRelay Manual 201 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 202 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Special function Parameter or process variable visible in a message text Timers On delay T Ta Off delay T Ta On Off delay Ta TH TL Retentive on delay T Ta Interval time delay relay T Ta Pulse output Edge triggered interval Ta Ty TL time delay relay Asynchronous pulse generator Ta Ty TL Random generator Ty Th Stairwell Light Switch Ta T Tp Ti Dual function switch Ta T TL Ty Ti Seven day time switch 3 on off day Twelve month time switch On Off Counter Up down counter Cnt On Off Operating hours counter MI Q OT Frequency trigger fa On
238. nectors when the system is in RUN Always switch off the power supply to IDEC SmartRelay and its components before you disconnect any connectors or components Substitution of components can impair suitability for Class Division 2 locations Combinations of equipment are subject to investigation by the local authority having jurisdiction at the time of installation Recycling and Disposal IDEC SmartRelay units can be fully recycled due to their low pollutant equipment Contact a certified electronic waste disposal center for environmentally acceptable recycling and disposal of your old devices IDEC SmartRelay Manual 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay 16 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring General guidelines Please note the following guidelines for installing and wiring your IDEC SmartRelay Always ensure that the wiring of your IDEC SmartRelay is compliant with current rules and standards Also conform with all national and regional regulations when you install and operate the devices For information on standards and regulations that apply to your specific case contact your local authorities e Always switch off power before you wire or install remove a module e Always use cables with appropriate conductor cr
239. nfo clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay 246 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card IDEC SmartRelay provides the following cartridges for program storage and real time clock backup e IDEC SmartRelay Memory cartridge e IDEC SmartRelay Battery cartridge e IDEC SmartRelay Memory Battery cartridge Each of the three cartridges is color coded to make them easily distinguishable from one another They also vary in size The IDEC SmartRelay Memory cartridge purple provides storage for the circuit program The IDEC SmartRelay Battery cartridge green provides battery backup of the real time clock for up to two years The IDEC SmartRelay Memory Battery cartridge dark brown provides both circuit program storage and battery backup of the real time clock A Warning Risk of death personal injury or property damage can occur if you use the battery cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge in a hazardous location Use the battery cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge only in non hazardous locations The FL1E IDEC SmartRelay Memory cartridge and the FL1E IDEC SmartRelay Memory Battery cartridge provide 32 Kbytes memory space four times the memory space of the FL1D IDEC SmartRelay Memory cartridge IDEC SmartRelay allows you to store only one circuit program in its memory If you want to modi
240. normally open contacts N Series circuit with a NOR not OR see page 119 available View in the circuit View inIDEC Name of the basic function diagram SmartRelay P AND Series circuit normally 2 gy see page 115 open contact p AND with Edge Detection T see page 116 3 m 4 a Parallel NAND circuit l not AND anrai 3 see page 116 s closed 4 contacts 4 NAND with Edge Detection 2 s 4 see page 117 J m Q4 OR see page 118 ae i JH PRES 4 normally closed contacts F LI Iam IDEC SmartRelay Manual IDEC SmartRelay functions View in the circuit View in IDEC Name of the basic function diagram SmartRelay lt XOR a exclusive OR Double changeover 2 see page 120 contact NOT Q negation inverter Normally Closed see page 120 Contact 4 2 1 AND Circuit diagram of a series circuitwith Symbol in IDEC SmartRelay several normally open contacts ha F bt pa The output of the AND is only 1 if all inputs are 1 i e all contacts are closed At an unused block input x x 1 AND function logic table ae ee nnMMO0OOOOOOOOH i i i 3530000 32 OOOO IN OOF f 0O0 r 00 0 0 0 IDEC SmartRelay Manual or or or ort or o oOo oOo f 0000000000000000 115 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4
241. nstallation and wiring Output Internal Circuit FL1E H12RCA FL1E B12RCA FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE FL1B M08B2R2 FL1B M08C2R2 FL1B M08D2R2 Relay Output 24V Internal Circuit a gt Q1 Q4 Internal Circuit FL1E H12SND FL1B M08B1S2 Transister Output Source 24V Internal Circuit Internal Circuit FL1D K2B2 FL1D K2BM2 Analog Output 0 10V 24V Internal Circuit A Circuit O V1 V2 10Q i C A 100nF 4 7kQ fag M1 M2 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 47 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring FL1D K2BM2 Analog Output 0 4 20mA 14V Internal Circuit 4 Internal sho ona 220 i 10nF O M1 M2 48 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 3 5 Connecting the AS interface bus To set the address of the module on the AS interface bus you need an addressing unit Valid addresses are in the range of 1 to 31 Use each address once only You can set the address on the AS interface bus before or after installation If the installed module is addressed via the address socket the AS Interface voltage must be disconnected beforehand This is necessary for safety reasons Z RUN STOP O As 22O AS I 5
242. nventional options for switching the lights e With a current impulse relay e With an automatic stairwell light switch The wiring of both these lighting systems is identical Lights Distribution box Distribution with Current impulse Push relay buttons or automatic stairwell light switch Components used e Momentary switches e Automatic stairwell light switch or current impulse relay IDEC SmartRelay Manual 265 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Lighting system with current impulse relay Function of a lighting system with current impulse relay e Press any pushbutton The lighting is switched on e Press any of the pushbuttons once again The lighting is switched off Disadvantage People often forget to switch off the lights Lighting system with an automatic stairwell light switch Function of a lighting system with automatic stairwell light switch e Press any pushbutton The lighting is switched on e The lights are switched off automatically when the preset time has expired Disadvantage The lights can not be switched on for a longer period of time e g when cleaning the stairway The switch for permanent lighting is usually located on the automatic stairwell light switch and may be difficult or impossible to access 8 1 3 Lighting system with IDEC SmartRelay An IDEC SmartRelay system allows you to replace the auto
243. of pushbutton control at the door Regardless of this they are reset with a timer or daylight control switch signal at the central offinput The pulse width of the off commands must be reduced by means of interval time delay relays to allow operation of the lights after they are switched off Components required e Pushbuttons S1 to S4 e Daylight control switch B1 e Timer E1 Interval time delay relays K1 and K2 e Pulse switches K3 to K6 with central OFF function Disadvantages of the previous solution e A substantial amount of switchgear needs to be installed to implement the necessary functions e Due tothe large number of mechanical components high wear and tear and maintenance expenditure is to be expected The modification of functions involves considerable effort 290 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 6 3 Luminous row control system with FL1E H12RCC L1 Luminous Luminous Luminous Luminous rows 1 rows 2 rows 3 rows 4 Components used e 1 to S4 normally open contact momentary pushbutton e B1 normally open contact daylight control switch IDEC SmartRelay Manual 291 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications Block diagram of
244. og amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 PI controller actual value AQ Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number For information on parameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Parameters KC TI Please note If parameter KC has value 0 the P function proportional control will not be executed If parameter TI has value 99 59 m the I function integral action control will not be executed Parameter p number of decimals Applies only to the PV SP Min and Max values displayed in a message text 218 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Timing diagram The nature manner and speed with which the AQ changes depend on the parameters KC and TI Thus the course of AQ in the diagram is merely an example A control action is continuous therefore the diagram portrays just an extract 1 A disturbance causes the PV to drop as Dir is positioned upwards AQ increases until PV corresponds again to SP 2 A disturbance causes the PV to drop as Dir is positioned downwards AQ decreases until PV corresponds again to SP It is not possible to change the
245. om Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 4 lf you have enabled retentivity for at least one function or a function is permanently retentive the current values are retained at POWER OFF Note When a power failure occurs while you are entering a circuit program the program in IDEC SmartRelay will be deleted after power is returned Before you modify the circuit program save a backup copy of your original to a memory cartridge a combined memory battery cartridge or to a computer WindLGC 2 4 2 Operating states IDEC SmartRelay base module operating states IDEC SmartRelay base module Pure knows has two operating states STOP and RUN STOP RUN The display shows No Program Display Screen mask for not FL1E B12 monitoring I Os and messages Switching IDEC SmartRelay to after START in the main menu programming mode not FL1E B12 not FL1E B12 e Switching IDEC SmartRelay to LED is red parameter assignment mode only FL1E B12 not FL1E B12 e LED is green only FL1E B12 Action of IDEC SmartRelay Action of IDEC SmartRelay e The input data is not read e IDEC SmartRelay reads the The circuit program is not status of the inputs executed e IDEC SmartRelay uses the circuit The relay contacts are program to calculate the status of permanently open or the the outputs transistor outputs are switched e IDEC SmartRelay swit
246. onfirm with OK then move the gt cursor to Yes and once again confirm with OK See Page 66 2 On the main menu select Program 3 On the Programming menu select Edit confirm with OK Next select Edit Prg and confirm with OK If required enter your password at the prompt and confirm with OK You can now modify the current circuit program Adding a block to a circuit program Move the cursor to the B in B1 B1 is the number of the OR block B1 Q1 Y BN Q1 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com To move the cursor Press lt We now insert the new block at this position Confirm with OK IDEC SmartRelay shows you the BN list 87 Programming IDEC SmartRelay Press W to select the SF list The SF list contains the special function blocks F sF Q1 Press OK The block of the first special function is shown When you select a special or basic Trg I function block IDEC SmartRelay shows me Q1 you the relevant function block The solid square cursor is positioned on the block Press W or A to select the required block Par Select your block off delay see the next figure and then press OK Before you press OK this shows the B2 The added block is entry Trg NK B1 Mo assigned the block number z TL B2 The cursor is positioned R Q1 at
247. onsumption e 12VDC typ 65 mA e 24V DC typ 40 mA 24VAC typ 90 mA Data transmission rate 19200 baud Inrush current 3 04 A at 12 VDC 6 36 A at 24 V DC 0 66 A at 24 V AC LCD Display and Backlight Backlight lifetime 20 000 hours Display lifetime 50 000 hours 1 Backlight lifetime is defined as The final brightness is 50 of the original brightness 2 Display lifetime is calculated under ordinary operating and storage conditions room temperature 20 8 C normal humidity below 65 relative humidity and not in exposure to direct sunlight 320 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Determining the cycle time The program cycle is the complete execution of the circuit program that is primarily the reading in of the inputs the processing of the circuit program and the subsequent reading out of the outputs The cycle time is the time required to execute a circuit program once in full The time required for a program cycle can be determined using a short test program This test program is created in IDEC SmartRelay and returns a value during its execution in parameter assignment mode from which the current cycle time is derived IDEC SmartRelay Manual 321 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Determining the cycle time Test program 1 Create the test program by linking an output
248. oss sections for the relevant current You can wire IDEC SmartRelay with cable conductor cross sections from 1 5 mm to 2 5 mm see Chapter 2 3 Do not exceed the screw torque of the terminals The maximum torque is 0 5 Nm see Chapter 2 3 e Keep the cabling as short as possible If longer cables are necessary you should use shielded versions You should always route your cables in pairs i e one neutral conductor plus one phase conductor or signal line e Always keep separate The AC wiring High voltage DC circuits with high frequency switching cycles Low voltage signal wiring Ensure that the wires are installed with appropriate strain relief e Provide a suitable lightning surge arrester for cables installed in hazardous areas e Do not connect an external power supply in parallel to the output load of a DC output This could develop a reverse current at the output if you have not installed a diode or similar barrier device e Reliable functioning of the equipment is only ensured with certified components Note IDEC SmartRelay devices may only be installed and wired by skilled personnel who are familiar with and follow general engineering rules and relevant regulations and standards IDEC SmartRelay Manual 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring What you must note when installing ZN IDEC SmartRelay i
249. other already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 PI controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number Timing diagram R En 1 1 Ral lt a a RING Sd te ance eo E Par Ls Ml 5h MN 0 il MI Configured time interval MN Time to go OT Total time expired since the last hi signal at input Ral IDEC SmartRelay Manual 165 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Functional description The operating hours counter monitors input En When En 1 IDEC SmartRelay computes the time expired and the time to go MN IDEC SmartRelay shows these times in parameter assignment mode Output Q is set when the time to go MN 0 A signal at reset input R resets out
250. ouse It must also be possible for a member of staff to open and close the gate locally For each gate we are going to use one FL1E H12RCC and one communication module The modules and the master are interconnected by means of a bus system This chapter describes a gate control system The structures of the other gate control systems are identical 1 Safety bar 2 flashing warning light IDEC SmartRelay Manual 285 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 5 1 Requirements for a gate control system e Every gate is opened and closed by means of a cord operated switch The gate is will be fully opened or fully closed e All gate can be opened and closed locally by means of pushbuttons e The gate can be opened and closed at the gatehouse by means of the bus system The GATE OPEN or GATE CLOSED status is indicated e An indicator lamp is switched on five seconds before the gate starts moving and when the gate is in motion e A safety pressure bar prevents harm to persons and objects from getting trapped or damaged when the gate closes Wiring of the gate control system with FL1E H12RCC and CM AS Interface L1 p gt S6 K1 K2 Gate Gate Indicator lamp 286 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applic
251. ow the current password in order to change it In the programming menu 1 Move the gt cursor to Password Press V or A 2 Confirm the Password Press OK Select Old and enter your old password in our case AA by repeating steps 3 through 6 as described earlier The display now shows Old AA New Now you can select New to enter the new password e g ZZ 3 Select Z Press A 4 Move to the next letter Press gt 5 Select Z Press A The display now shows Old AA New zE 6 Confirm your new password Press OK Your new password ZZ is now set and you are returned to the programming menu Deactivating the password from the IDEC SmartRelay Base module To deactivate the password to allow for example another user to edit your circuit program you must know your current password in our example ZZ the same as if you were changing it To deactivate the password following these steps in the programming menu 1 Move the gt cursor to Password Press Wor A 2 Confirm the Password Press OK Select Old and enter your current password as described in steps 3 to 5 Confirm your entries with OK 80 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay The display shows Old ZA New Clear the password by leaving the inp
252. pa Bo o WME aang empty IDEC SmartRelay in 0 123456789 RUN mode 1 0123456 B3 is with a program copied from Par 0300 we eO the memory cartridge or Cnt 0028 with program a 123456789 combined memory battery IDEC SmartRelay 1 0123456789 Cartridge in IDEC in RUN mode peter SmartRelay B1 gt Program with stored program from a Card IDEC SmartRelay amp 91 spate Setup Start Program in z memory empty gt Program with program copied from Card the memory cartridge or py gt Setup combined memory battery with program start cartridge in IDEC SmartRelay You can also memorize four simple rules for starting IDEC SmartRelay 1 If neither IDEC SmartRelay nor the inserted memory IDEC SmartRelay Manual cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge contains a circuit program IDEC SmartRelay with display unit reports No Program Press ESC A circuit program on the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge is automatically copied to IDEC SmartRelay The circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay is overwritten If there is a circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay or on the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge IDEC SmartRelay adopts the operational state it had prior to POWER OFF Versions without display unit FL1E B12 automatically change from STOP to RUN LED changes from red to green 53 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr c
253. pansion Text Display with cap interface cable connector a3 Version number 6 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay FL1B J2B2 4 Q C 8 e T 36 53 1 Power supply 9 Mechanical PE terminal for coding pins connecting earth and 2 Inputs AO Mechanical the shielding of coding sockets analog measuring cables D RUN STOP KE Slide a3 Version number indicator Expansion interface FL1D K2B2 a i 53 4 Power supply Expansion 4 Slide interface 2 Outputs 9 Mechanical PE terminal for coding pins connecting earth D RUN STOP M Mechanical a3 Version number indicator coding sockets IDEC SmartRelay Manual 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay FL1D K2BM2 W Y 53 4 Power supply Expansion A Slide interface 2 Outputs 9 Mechanical D PE terminal for coding pins connecting earth 7 RUN STOP Mechanical A3 Version number indicator coding sockets 8 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Text Display 128 2 Communication interface Power supply The Text Display includes a wider display area than the IDEC SmartRelay D
254. pressing ESC OK IDEC SmartRelay changes to parameter assignment mode and opens the parameter assignment menu gt Stop Set Param Seti Prg Name Description of the four menu items of the parameter assignment menu e Stop You select this command to stop your circuit program and thus change to the main menu of programming mode To do so 1 To move the gt cursor to Stop Press Aor V 2 To confirm Stop Press OK Stop Prg gt No Yes 3 To move the gt cursor to Yes Press Aor V 4 To confirm Yes Press OK 234 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay shows the main menu of the programming mode gt Program Card Setup Start Set Param For information on the various parameters refer to the Chapters 5 1 1 to 5 1 3 e Set For information on the various settings refer to Chapter 5 2 Prg Name This menu command only allows you to read the name of your circuit program It is not possible to modify this name in parameter assignment mode see Chapter 3 6 4 5 1 1 Parameters Note In the following discourse on parameters we presume that the respective default parameter protection mode has been maintained This is a prerequisite for viewing and editing parameters in the parameter assignment mode See Chapter
255. programming menu IDEC SmartRelay s main menu gt eae Edit IDEC SmartRelay s programming Clear Prg menu Password Msg Config Here you can also move the gt cursor by pressing A and V Move the gt cursor to Edit and confirm with OK gt Edit Prg The Edit menu of IDEC SmartRelay Edit Name AQ Memory IDEC SmartRelay Manual 69 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 6 2 no Move the gt cursor to Edit Prg for editing the circuit program and confirm with OK IDEC SmartRelay now shows you the first output The first output of IDEC SmartRelay Q1 You are now in programming mode Press A and to select the other outputs Now start to edit your circuit program Note Because we have not yet saved a password for the circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay you can directly enter editing mode When you select Edit after you have saved a password protected circuit program you are prompted to enter a password and to confirm it with OK You can only edit the program after you have entered the correct password see Chapter 3 6 5 The first circuit program Let us now take a look at the following parallel circuit consisting of two switches Circuit diagram 70 The corresponding circuit diagram S1 l s2 I The load is switched on K1 with S1 OR S2 IDEC
256. put Q and sets the preset value of MI at the counter for the duration of MN The operating hours counter OT is not affected With a signal at the reset input Ral you reset output Q and set the preset value of MI at the counter for the duration of MN The operating hours counter OT is reset to zero Depending on your configuration of parameter Q the output is either reset with a signal at input R or Ral Q 0 R or when a reset signal is set hi or the En signal is set lo Q 0 R En Viewing the MI MN and OT values In WindLGC you can fetch the hours counter via the Tools gt Transfer Hours counter menu command Limit value of OT The value of the operating hours in OT are retained when you reset the hours counter with a signal at input R The hours counter OT will be reset to zero with a transition from 0 to 1 at Ral The hours counter OT continues the count as long as En 1 irrespective of the status at the reset input R The counter limit of OT is 99999 h The hours counter stops when it reaches this value In programming mode you can set the initial value of OT MN is calculated according to the following formula when reset input R never enabled MN MI OT MI Example MI 30h OT 100h MN 30 100 30 MN 30 10 MN 20h Hours 2 20 40 60 80 100 120 30h 30h 30h ot 100h 1 20h Moi In runtime mode the value OT can not be preset If the value for MI is changed there would be no c
257. r Switching rate Mechanical 10 Hz Ohmic load lamp load 2 Hz Inductive load 0 5 Hz Notice For fluorescent lamps with capacitors the technical data of fluorescent lamp ballasts must also be considered If the maximum allowed surge current is exceeded fluorescent lamps must be switched with appropriate contactor relays IDEC SmartRelay Manual 301 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data A 3 Technical data FL1B M08C2R2 FL1B M08C2R2 Power supply Input voltage 100 240 V AC DC Permissible range 85 265 V AC 100 253 VDC Permissible mains frequency 47 63 Hz Power consumption e 100 VAC 34 45 mA e 240 VAC 30 32 mA e 100 VDC 5 15mA e 240 VDC 5 10 MA Voltage failure buffering e 100 V AC DC typ 10 ms 240 V AC DC typ 20 ms Power loss at e 100 VAC 3 9 4 1 VA e 240 V AC 7 4 7 6 VA e 100 VDC 0 5 1 8 W 240 VDC 1 2 24W Backup of the real time clock at 25 C Accuracy of the real time clock Digital inputs Number 4 Electrical isolation No High speed inputs not applicable for this module Input frequency e Normal input e max 4 Hz e High speed input e not applicable for this module Input voltage L1 Signal 0 lt 40V AC e Signal 1 gt 79V AC Signal 0 lt 30 VDC e Signal 1 gt 79VDC Input current at Signal 0 lt 0 03 mA AC
258. r 4 4 1 Timing diagram Trg i l TL gt lt T Q _ Te 1 i is busy T 5 n E Functional description A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg sets output Q If output Q 0 and input Trg is set hi at least for the duration of T1 the permanent lighting function is enabled and output Q is set accordingly The off delay T is triggered when input Trg returns to 0 before T has expired Output Q is reset when T T You can output an off warning signal prior to the expiration of the off delay time T T that resets Q for the duration of the prewarning time period T A subsequent signal at Trg always resets T and the output Q IDEC SmartRelay Manual 149 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure Setting the Par parameter Note the defaults specified in Chapter 4 3 2 Note T T and Ty must all have the same timebase View in programming mode example B5 1 R Protection mode and retentivity T 60 005 lt Oftdelay TL 10 005 Permanent light on time Press gt B5 2 Do T 30 00s lt Start of the off warning period T TY T L 20 005 lt WW Off warning time View in parameter assignment mode example B5 1 T 60 00s TL 10 00s Ta 06 0
259. r can be used for e Washing clothes e Irrigation system for gardens e Watering indoor plants e Carwash e Toilet flushing installations The sketch below illustrates how such a rainwater utilization system is operated Rainwater supply line K4 pply W Drinking water supply line Pressure switch Control in the distribution box Pressure tank Rainwater reservoir Service water connection 2 Drinking water supply Off Drinking water supply On Dry run protection Off Dry run protection On The rainwater is collected in a reservoir From the reservoir a pumping station supplies a respective line system From there it can be tapped in the same way as normal drinking water If the reservoir should run dry it can be topped up with drinking water IDEC SmartRelay Manual 293 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 7 1 8 7 2 294 Requirements for a control system of a service water pump e Service water must be available at all times In case of emergency the control system must automatically switch over to drinking water supply e When switching over to the drinking water supply the ingress of rainwater into the drinking water system must be prevented e The service water pump may not be switched on if the reservoir has run low of rainwater dry run protection Previous solution Auxiliary circuit L1
260. r example e A graphic interface for offline creation of your circuit program by means of Ladder Diagram contact chart circuit diagram or Function Block Diagram function chart e Simulation of your circuit program on the PC e Generating and printing of an overview chart for the circuit program Saving a backup of the circuit program on the hard drive or other media e Comparing circuit programs e Easy configuration of blocks e Transferring the circuit program in both directions from IDEC SmartRelay to the PC fromthe PC to IDEC SmartRelay Reading the values of the hour counter Setting the time of day Summertime wintertime conversion Online test Display of status changes and process variables of IDEC SmartRelay in RUN mode Status of a digital I O memory markers shift register bits and cursor keys The values of all analog I Os and memory markers The results of all blocks The current values including the times of selected blocks e Starting and stopping circuit program execution via the PC RUN STOP The IDEC SmartRelay alternatives As you can see WindLGC represents an alternative to conventional engineering methods with several advantages e You can develop the circuit program on your PC e You simulate the circuit program on your computer and verify its functions before you actually implement it in your system e You can add comments to the circuit program and create hardcopies e You can
261. rcuit diagram to IDEC SmartRelay program View of a circuit diagram You know of course how a circuit logic is represented ina circuit diagram Nevertheless here is an example j rd 1 S2 K1 S3 K1 E1 Load E1 is switched on and off by means of the switches S1 OR S2 AND S3 Relay K1 picks up when condition S1 OR S2 AND S3 is met Creating this circuit with IDEC SmartRelay In IDEC SmartRelay you create a circuit logic by interconnecting blocks and connectors L1 wno Wiring of the inputs M S1 S3 Circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay ia N 3 _ ri 71 13 I2 Ql x x i Baa of the outputs IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 63 Programming IDEC SmartRelay Note Although you have four inputs available for logic operations Basic functions see Chapter 4 2 most of the views will only show three inputs for reasons of clarity You program this fourth input and assign parameters just like you do with the other three inputs To create a circuit logic in IDEC SmartRelay start at the circuit output The output is the load or relay that is to be switched Convert the circuit logic into blocks by working through the circuit starting at the output and ending at the input Step 1 The Normally Open Contact S3 is interconnected in seri
262. rcuit program e Read write the summertime wintertime When you start the upload download in STOP the following display appears automatically PC lt gt fal m DEC Smart Rel ay IDEC SmartRelay Manual 261 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay software Closing the PC lt gt IDEC SmartRelay mode When the data transfer is completed the connection to the PC is shut down automatically Note If the circuit program created with WindLGC is password protected both the circuit program and the password are downloaded to IDEC SmartRelay The password promptis enabled at the end of the data transfer The upload of a password protected program created in IDEC SmartRelay is only possible after the correct password is entered in WindLGC 262 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications We have provided a small collection of applications in this manual to give you an impression of the versatility of IDEC SmartRelay For these examples we have recorded once again the original solution of the circuit diagram and compared it with the IDEC SmartRelay solutions You can find solutions for the following tasks Page Stairway or corridor lighting system page 265 Automatic door page 269 Ventilation system page 276 Factory gate page 281 Central controlling and monitoring of sever
263. res e Monitoring of major control components using online tests cyclic interrupt for the CPU etc IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring These measures are referred to as basic measures Carrying out tests You must however ensure safety in your plant Before finally commissioning a system carry out complete functional testing as well as all the necessary safety testing In testing also include any predictable faults that can occur This means that you will avoid any danger to the plant or to people during operation Risks In all cases where the occurrence of failures can result in material damage or injury to persons special measures must be taken to enhance the safety of the installation and therefore also of the situation System specific and special regulations exist for such applications They must be observed on installing the control system for example VDE 0116 for burner control systems For electronic control equipment with a safety function the measures that have to be taken to prevent or rectify faults are based on the risks involved in the installation Beyond a certain degree of hazard the basic measures mentioned above are not sufficient Additional measures must be implemented and approved for the controller Important information The instructions in the operating manual must be fol
264. ription The 0 to 1 signal transition at input Trg triggers the current time T Output Q is set when T T A further signal at input Trg does not influence the time T4 The output and the time T are reset with the next 1 signal at input R If elenii is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure 4 4 5 Interval time delay relay Pulse output Short description An input pulse generates a signal with a configurable period at the output Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input Trg A signal at input Trg Trigger triggers Trg IL the time for the wiping relay function Iya Far Parameter The output is switched off after the time T has expired output signal tran sition 1 to 0 Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q A signal at input Trg sets Q If the input signal 1 output Q remains set for the time Ta Parameter T Note the information on parameter T in Chapter 4 3 2 The time for parameter T can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function You can use the actual values of the following functions Wier comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 18 Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 e Analog math actual v
265. rogrammed analog math function block Functional description The analog math error detection block sets the output when the referenced analog math function block has an error You can program the function to set the output on a zero division error an overflow error or when either type of error occurs If AutoRst is set the output is reset prior to the next execution of the function block If AutoRst is not set then whenever the output is set it remains set until the analog math error detection block is reset with the R parameter This way even if the error subsequently clears the circuit program still has knowledge that an error did occur at some point In any scan cycle if the referenced analog math function block executes before the analog math error detection function block the error is detected in the same scan cycle if the referenced analog math function block executes after the analog math error detection function block the error is detected in the next scan cycle 230 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Analog math error detection logic table In the table below Err represents the parameter of the analog math error detection instruction that selects which type of error to detect ZD represents the zero division bit set by the analog math instruction at the end of its execution 1 if the error occurred 0 if not OF repres
266. rtRelay installation and wiring Special features of FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1E H12SND Fast inputs 13 14 15 and l6 These versions are also equipped with fast inputs up down counters frequency triggers The restrictions mentioned earlier do not apply to these fast inputs Note The fast inputs 13 14 15 and I6 are the same as in the previous versions FL1A to FL1D therefore a circuit program that is written in these versions can be transferred to the new FL1E devices with the programming software WindLGC without any changes to these features The fast inputs have increased from 2 kHz to 5 kHz with the FL1E series Expansion modules do not have fast inputs Analog inputs 11 and I2 I7 and 18 The inputs l1 12 17 and 18 of IDEC SmartRelay versions FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1E H12SND can be used as either digital inputs or analog inputs The input mode is defined in the IDEC SmartRelay circuit program The inputs 11 12 I7 and I8 provide digital inputs and the inputs Al3 Al4 Al1 and Al2 provide analog inputs as described in Chapter 4 1 Al3 corresponds to the input terminal l1 Al4 corresponds to 12 Al1 corresponds to I7 Al2 corresponds to I8 The use of Al3 and Al4 is optional You configure your IDEC SmartRelay to use either two or four analog inputs as described in section 5 2 4 When using inputs I1 12 I7 and 18 as analog inputs only the range from 0 to 10 V DC is available Connecting a pot
267. rwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay Current value of a counter View of a counter parameter in parameter assignment mode B3 B3 On 001234 or On 123456 Off 000000 curent OF f B021 Cnt 000120 count Cnt 000120 value You can change the on off threshold This does not apply if the on or off threshold represents the result of another function in the example in section 4 4 13 this is B021 Current value of an hour counter View of an hour counter parameter in parameter assignment mode B16 1 MI 0100h 4 Time interval 00 m B16 2 OT 00083h Total operating hours 15 m B16 3 MN 0016h lt Time to go 45 m You can edit the configured time interval MI Current value of a frequency trigger View of the parameter of a frequency trigger in parameter assignment mode B15 On 0009 On threshold Off 0005 Off threshold fa 0010 lt Process variable You can change the on off threshold 238 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay 5 2 Setting the default values for IDEC Smart Relay You can set the following default values for an IDEC SmartRelay base module Clock settings You can set the default values for time of day and date summertime wintertime conversion and synchronization e inparameter assignment mode by means o
268. rwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameter p number of decimals Applies only to the values displayed in a message text Timing diagram En S1 o M S2 Functional description If input En is set then the function issues one of 4 possible analog values V1 to V4 at the output AQ depending on the value of S1 and S2 If the input En is not set then the function issues the analog value 0 at output AQ Analog output If you interconnect this special function with a real analog output note that the analog output can only process values between 0 and 1000 To do this you may need to connect an additional amplifier between the analog output of the special function and the real analog output Using this amplifier you standardize the output range of the special function to a value range of 0 to 1000 Setting the Par parameter View in programming mode example B3 1 B3 2 V1 04000 Pess V3 B020 V2 02000 V4 B021 p View in parameter assignment mode B3 1 B3 2 V1 04000 Pgs V3 B020 V2 02000 V4 B021 AQ 4000 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 211 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 27 Analog Ramp Control Short description The Analog ramp control instruction allows the output to be changed from the current level to the selected level at
269. s interrupted Recommendation Position IDEC SmartRelay CM AS Interface on the far right side If communication is interrupted the switching outputs are reset after about 40 to 100 ms IDEC SmartRelay Manual 55 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 56 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Programming refers to creating a circuit program from the IDEC SmartRelay base module In this chapter you will learn how to use IDEC SmartRelay to create the IDEC SmartRelay circuit programs for your application WindLGC is the IDEC SmartRelay programming software that you can use on your PC to quickly and easily create test modify save and print the circuit programs The topics in this manual however relate only to the creation of circuit programs on the actual IDEC SmartRelay base module The programming software WindLGC contains extensive online help See also Chapter 7 for additional information Note IDEC SmartRelay versions without a display unit that is the FL1E B12RCE FL1E B12RCA and FL1E B12RCC versions do not have an operator panel and display unit They are primarily designed for use in small machine and process equipment engineering systems for series production FL1E B12
270. s and processes Special versions without operator panel and display unit are available for series production applications in small machine apparatus switching cabinet and installation engineering IDEC SmartRelay Manual 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Getting started with IDEC SmartRelay Which devices are available IDEC SmartRelay Base is available in two voltage classes e Class 1 lt 24 V i e 12 V DC 24 V DC 24 V AC e Class 2 gt 24 V i e 100 240 V AC DC IDEC SmartRelay Base is available in two versions With display 8 inputs and 4 outputs e Without display IDEC SmartRelay Pure 8 inputs and 4 outputs Each version is integrated into four subunits is equipped with an expansion interface and Text Display interface and provides 39 pre configured standard and special function blocks for the creation of your circuit program Which expansion modules are available e IDEC SmartRelay digital modules are available for operation with 12 V DC 24 V AC DC and 100 240 V AC DC and are equipped with four inputs and four outputs e IDEC SmartRelay analog modules are available for operation with 24 V DC and some with 12 V DC depending on the specific module Each is equipped with two analog inputs or two analog outputs The digital analog modules are integrated in two or four subunits Each one is equipped with two expansion interfaces for connecting
271. s changed after a Set Clock is executed or after a summertime wintertime conversion 102 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 7 Memory space and circuit program size The size of a circuit program in IDEC SmartRelay is limited by the memory space memory used by the blocks Memory areas e Program memory IDEC SmartRelay allows only a limited number of blocks in your circuit program The second limitation is based on the maximum number of bytes a circuit program may contain The total number of bytes used can be determined by adding up the number of bytes used for the relevant function blocks e Retentive memory Rem In this area IDEC SmartRelay stores values which need to be retentive for example the operating hours counter value Blocks with optional retentivity use this memory area only if this function is actually enabled IDEC SmartRelay Manual 103 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Caution At a power failure the logical input level may drop to zero before IDEC SmartRelay can save the functions to the retentive memory In this case the IDEC SmartRelay saves the function values determined by the zero state at its inputs of the inputs Example On delay With an input 11 connected to a Trg connector of an On d
272. s designed for fixed and enclosed installation in the housing or the control cabinet Warning Death serious bodily injury or considerable damage to property can occur Modules of an IDEC SmartRelay are open facilities This means that you must install IDEC SmartRelay only in a housing or cabinet Allow access to the housings or cabinets only with the use of a key or a tool and only allow access to authorized or approved personnel It is permissible to operate IDEC SmartRelay from the front at any time Safety of electronic control equipment 18 Introduction The notes below apply regardless of the type or manufacturer of the electronic control Reliability Maximum reliability of IDEC SmartRelay devices and components is achieved by implementing extensive and cost effective measures during development and manufacture This includes the following e Use of high quality components e Worst case design of all circuits e Systematic and computer aided testing of all components e Burn in of all large scale integrated circuits e g processors memory etc ee preventing static charge when handling MOS S e Visual checks at different stages of manufacture e Continuous heat run test at elevated ambient temperature over a period of several days e Careful computer controlled final testing e Statistical evaluation of all returned systems and components to enable the immediate initiation of suitable corrective measu
273. s in particular are described in Chapter 4 4 4 3 1 Designation of the inputs Logical inputs Here you will find the description of the connectors you can use to create a logical link to other blocks or to the inputs of the IDEC SmartRelay unit e S Set A signal at input S sets the output to logical 1 R Reset The reset input R takes priority over all other inputs and resets the outputs Trg Trigger This input is used to trigger the start of a function e Cnt Count This input is used for counting pulses Fre Frequency Frequency signals to be evaluated are applied to this input Dir Direction This input determines the direction or En Enable This input enables a block function When this input is 0 other signals to the block will be ignored Inv Invert A signal at this input is inverted Ral Reset all All internal values are reset Note Unused logical inputs of special functions default to logical 0 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 121 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Connector X at SF inputs SF inputs connected to connector x are set low That is the inputs carry a lo signal Parameter inputs At some of the inputs you do not apply any signals You configure the relevant block values instead Examples Par Parameter This input will not be connected Here you s
274. s status that is the output is set or reset with each 0 to 1 transition at input Trg and if the inputs S and R 0 The signal at input Trg does not influence the special function when Sor R 1 You set the current impulse relay with a signal at input S The output is set hi You reset the current impulse relay with a signal at input R The output is set lo IDEC SmartRelay Manual 191 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Status diagram Par Qn 1 S R Trg Qn i 0 0 0 0 0 i 0 0 0 0 1 1 i 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 o gt 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 J 0 1 0 0 1 1 RS 0 1 1 0 0 RS 0 1 1 O gt 1 0 SR 0 1 1 0 1 SR 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 RS 1 1 1 0 0 RS 1 1 1 0 1 0 SR 1 1 1 0 1 SR 1 1 1 0 1 1 RS or SR Triggering signal is effective because S and R 0 Depending on your configuration either input R takes priority over input S input S is not effective when R 1 or vice versa input R is not effective when S 1 After a power failure the current impulse relay and output Q are reset if you have not enabled retentivity View in programming mode B29 Par RS R Press VOA B29 R Par SR This special function is not available in par
275. specific block s memory space requirement would exceed the space available in IDEC SmartRelay See Chapter 3 7 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 109 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 1 Constants and connectors Co Constants and connectors Co represent inputs outputs memory markers and constant voltage levels constants Inputs 1 Digital inputs Digital inputs are identified with an I The number of the digital inputs 11 12 corresponds to the number of the input connectors of the IDEC SmartRelay base module and of the connected digital modules in the order of their installation The fast digital inputs 13 14 15 and I6 of the IDEC SmartRelay versions FL1E H12SND FL1E H12RCE and FL1E B12RCE can be used as fast counters 2 Analog inputs The IDEC SmartRelay versions FL1E H12SND FL1E H12RCE and FL1E B12RCE are equipped with the inputs 11 12 17 and 18 which can also be programmed for use as Al3 Al4 Al1 and Al2 inputs As described in section 5 2 4 you can configure these modules to use either two analog inputs Al1 and Al2 or all four Signals at the 11 12 I7 and l8 inputs are interpreted as digital values and those at the Al3 Al4 Al1 and Al2 inputs are interpreted as analog values Note that Al3 corresponds to 11 and Al4 corresponds to 12 This numbering preserves the previous correspondence of Al1 to I7 and Al2 to I8 that was
276. splay when IDEC SmartRelay transitions to RUN mode inparameter assignment mode by means of the set menu StartScreen menu item See Chapter 5 2 5 Message Text settings You can select settings that apply to all message text function blocks from the Programming menu See Chapter 4 4 23 5 2 1 Setting the time of day and date FL1E H12RC You can set the time of day and the date inparameter assignment mode by means of the set menu Clock menu item in programming mode by means of the setup menu Clock menu item To set the TOD and the date in parameter assignment mode 1 Select parameter assignment mode see Chapter 5 1 2 Onthe parameter assignment menu select Set Press Aorv Stop Set Param gt Set Prg Name 3 Confirm Set Press OK 4 Move the gt cursor to Clock Press Aor V 5 Confirm Clock Press OK 6 Move the gt cursor to Set Clock Press Aor V 7 Apply Set Clock Press OK Note The Set Clock command is only executed if your IDEC SmartRelay is equipped with a real time clock FL1E H12RC You set the real time clock of IDEC SmartRelay by means of the Set Clock command 240 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display Set Clock The cursor is positioned
277. sssseeseees 250 6 2 Inserting and removing memory and battery cartridges 252 6 3 Copying data from IDEC SmartRelay to the memory cartridge ssssssesssesusunununnenenununununnnnnnnnnnunennnnnnnnnna 254 6 4 Copying data from the memory cartridge to IDEC SmartRelay cccccsssecseessesssesseeseeseesineesetennseneteneenens 256 7 IDEC SmartRelay software scessssseeeee 259 7 1 Connecting IDEC SmartRelay to a PC scsscssssseeteseeteeeens 261 Bi ADIGA ONS sissien etecatetvcteetesetedsases 263 8 1 Stairway or Corridor lighting scscsssse sees eeesnieeeteeees 265 8 1 1 Requirements for a stairway lighting system cess 265 8 1 2 Previous solution ce ceceeeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceecaecaeeeteaecaeeeseeeeaeaeees 265 8 1 3 Lighting system with IDEC SmartRelay ccsccseseeeeeeees 266 x IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 8 1 4 Special features and expansion options cecceceeeeeee steers 268 82 lt AULO MAIC DOOM icccrcceiccccietceieccccccensctig naa 269 8 2 1 Requirements of an automatic COOV cccceceeeeeeeeeseeteeeeeeeeeeees 269 8 2 2 Conventional solution ccccceccssccsesececeececsececeececseeecseeeeneeesaees 270 8 2 3 Door control system with IDEC SmartRelay 0 cceeeeeee 270 8 2 4 Special features and expansion Options ecceceeeeeee steer 273 8 2 5 Extended solut
278. st air 13 Q2 flow sensor x x IL Fresh air Q1 exhaust fan _ ite tan 10s Exhaust air 1 flow sensor 13 Fresh air fan Q2 Fresh air flow sensor IDEC SmartRelay Manual 279 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications You can also generate a message at output Q4 1 Q3 D Q4 Error Messege The relay contacts of output Q4 are always closed when the system is in operation Relay Q4 does not drop off unless there is a power failure or a fault in the system This contact can be used for remote monitoring for example 280 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 4 Factory door Safety pressure bar The entrance to a company s premises is often closed with a gate The gate is only opened to let vehicles in and out The gate is controlled by the porter ATSTESSNSESEGAGH 8 4 1 Requirements for a gate control system e The gate is opened and closed by means of pushbuttons in the gatehouse The porter can monitor the operation of the gate at the same time e The gate is normally fully opened or fully closed The gate motion can be interrupted at any time An indicator lamp is switched on five seconds before the gate starts moving and when the gate is in motion A s
279. sure that there is enough space for the inputs outputs of the AS interface in the IDEC SmartRelay s address space If you are already using more than 12 physical outputs or more than 20 physical inputs it is no longer possible to operate the CM AS interface IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 4 Putting into operation 2 4 1 Switching on the IDEC SmartRelay Power On IDEC SmartRelay does not have a power switch The reaction of IDEC SmartRelay during startup depends on the following e Whether a circuit program is stored in IDEC SmartRelay Whether a memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge is inserted e Whether this is an IDEC SmartRelay version without display unit FL1E B12 e ae status of IDEC SmartRelay at the time of power ailure All possible reactions of IDEC SmartRelay are described on the following page To ensure that the expansion module on IDEC SmartRelay changes to RUN mode check the following e Has the sliding contact between IDEC SmartRelay and the expansion module snapped into place properly e ls the power supply connected to the expansion module e In addition always ensure that you switch on the power supply to the expansion module first before activating the power supply to the IDEC SmartRelay base module or activate both power supplies at the same time if
280. system runtime After you have removed the memory cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge IDEC SmartRelay outputs the message No Program A removal of the cartridge during RUN will lead to impermissible operating states Always heed the following warning A Warning Do not touch the open slot of the memory cartridge with your fingers or with a metallic or conductive object The memory cartridge socket might be under voltage if the polarity is accidentally reversed at L1 and N The memory cartridge battery cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge must only be removed by qualified personnel 252 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay memory and battery cartridge card Removing the memory cartridge battery cartridge or combined memory battery cartridge To remove the memory cartridge carefully insert a screwdriver with a 3 mm blade into the groove on the upper end of the card and lever the module partially out of the slot You can now remove the memory cartridge Ir ey A r vary e esr 1 p 1 Carefully insert a screwdriver into the slot at the upper end of the memory cartridge and ease it out of the slot a little 2 Hold the memory cartridge at both sides using the memory cartridge removal tool MT 101 and pull the memory cartridge straight out To remove a battery cartridge or combined memory
281. t cursor to Start Press Aor V 4 Confirm Start Press OK IDEC SmartRelay is back in RUN mode You can press lt or gt to scroll the Mo 09 30 ages and to monitor the I O states 2008 05 26 a IDEC SmartRelay Manual 91 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 6 8 92 Deleting a block Let us assume you want to delete the block B2 from your circuit program and connect B1 directly to Q1 Q1 parf _ l Proceed as follows 1 Switch IDEC SmartRelay to programming mode as a reminder refer to Page 66 2 Select Edit Press Aor V 3 Confirm Edit Press OK If required enter your password and confirm with OK 4 Select Edit Prg Press Aor V 5 Confirm Edit Prg Press OK 6 Move the cursor to B2 the input of Q1 Press lt B2 Q1 7 Confirm with OK 8 Now replace block B2 with block B1 at output Q1 The procedure Select the BN list Press Aor V Accept the BN list Press OK Select B1 Press Aor V Apply B1 Press OK Result Block B2 is deleted because it is no longer used in the circuit Block B1 has replaced B2 directly at the output IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 3 6 9 Deleting block groups Let us assume you want to delete the blocks B1 and B2 from
282. t 2 Select the retentivity setting Press Aor V The display now shows B2 R B2 lt T 12 00m or T 12 00m Retentivity R Current data Retentivity Current data is is retained not retained 3 Confirm your entries with OK IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Note For further information on the protection mode refer to Chapter 4 3 5 For further information on retentivity refer to Chapter 4 3 4 You can modify the protection mode and retentivity setting only in programming mode This is not possible in parameter assignment mode In this manual the protection mode or and retentivity R or settings are only shown in the displays where these can actually be changed Verification of the circuit program This program branch for Q1 is now completed IDEC SmartRelay shows you the output Q1 You can once again view the circuit program on the display Use the keys to browse the circuit program that is pres lt or gt to move from block to block A and W to move between the inputs at a block Closing the programming mode Although you were shown how to exit the programming mode when you created your first circuit program here is a reminder 1 Return to the programming menu Press ESC 2 Return to the main menu Press ESC 3 Move the g
283. t then the analog modules examples above The special function PI controller is an exception the Al used for the value PV should be on the IDEC SmartRelay base module or an analog input module adjacent to the IDEC SmartRelay base module We recommend that you position the CM AS Interface on the far right hand side If the AS Interface voltage fails communication between the IDEC SmartRelay system and expansion modules that are arranged to the right of the IDEC SmartRelay CM AS Interface expansion module is interrupted The Text Display module is installed separately You connect it to the IDEC SmartRelay base module with the included Text Display cable IDEC SmartRelay Manual 21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 1 2 Setup with different voltage classes Rules Digital modules can only be directly connected to devices of the same voltage class You can connect analog and communication modules to devices of any voltage class Overview Connecting an expansion module to IDEC SmartRelay base module In the following tables X means that the connection is possible means that the connection is not possible IDEC SmartRelay Expansion modules base module FL1B FL1B FL1B FLiB FL1B CM MO8B2R2 M08B1S2 MO8D2R2 MO8C2R2 J2B2 FL1D K2B2 FL1D K2BM2 FL1
284. ter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number The timebase is configurable For information on valid ranges and parameter defaults refer to Chapter 4 4 1 222 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameters p number of decimals Parameter p applies only to the display of the Ax value in a message text Functional description The function reads the value of the signal at the analog input AX This value is multiplied by the value of parameter A gain Parameter B offset is added to the product as follows Ax Gain Offset Actual value Ax The function block calculates the proportion of the actual value Ax to the range The block sets the digital output Q high for the same proportion of the T periodic time parameter and sets Q low for the remainder of the time period Examples with Timing Diagrams The following examples show how the PWM instruction modulates a digital output signal from the analog input value 1 An analog value of 500 range 0 1000 as the value for Ax must be modulated to a digital signal string The user defined T periodic time parameter is 4 seconds At the digital output of the PWM function the digital signal string is 2 seconds high 2 seconds low 2 seconds high 2 seconds low and continues in that pattern as long as parameter En high
285. th error detection function block in your circuit program to detect these errors and to control the program behavior as needed You program one analog math error detection function block to reference one specific analog math function block IDEC SmartRelay Manual 227 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Examples The following tables show some simple example analog math block parameters and the resulting equations and output values Vi Opi Prt V2 Op2 Pr2 V3 Op3 Pr3 V4 12 M 6 H 3 L 1 Equation 12 6 3 1 Result 13 V1 Op1 Pr1 V2 Op2 Pr2 V3 Op3 Pr3 V4 2 L 3 M 1 H 4 Equation 2 3 1 4 Result 17 V1 Op1 Pr1 V2 Op2 Pr2 V3 Op3 Pr3 V4 100 H 25 L 2 M 1 Equation 100 25 2 1 Result 25 228 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Setting the Par parameter The following illustration shows the view in programming mode that corresponds to the first example 12 6 3 1 Bl 1 Bl 2 V1 00012 pe V2 0006 OP1 OP2 PR1 M PR2 H Press lt gt Bl 3 Bl 4 V3 00003 bee V4 00001 OP3 Qen 0 0 PR3 L p 0
286. th fans are monitored by means of a flow sensor e An excess atmospheric pressure may never develop in the room The fresh air fan must only be switched on if safe functioning of the exhaust fan is signaled by the flow sensor A warning lamp indicates failure of a fan IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications The circuit diagram for conventional solutions is as follows Auxiliary circuit L1 ne e a P _ Si KI K2 K4 K5 Ks f s2 shi H S3lvs 1 KICI KEI K3 KAEO HiG KSC H2 N e e Exhaust air Fresh air Operation Error The fans are monitored by means of flow sensors If no air flow is registered within a short waiting time the system is switched off and an error message is output This message can be acknowledged by pressing the OFF button In addition to the flow sensors the fan monitoring system also requires an evaluating circuit with several switching devices This evaluating circuit can be replaced by a single IDEC SmartRelay unit Wiring of an air conditioning system with FL1E H12RCC te a SOF S2 v gt K1 K H1 di Exhaust Fresh air fan fan IDEC SmartRelay Manual 277 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
287. the A and Vv keys to scroll through value choices Use the gt key to navigate to the second screen from the last line of the first screen and the lt key to navigate from the top line of the second screen to the first screen Use the OK key to accept changes 224 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions View in parameter assignment mode B1 1 B1 2 Mi n 00000 es B 00000 Max 01000 T 00 04s A 1 00 4 4 30 Analog math Short description The analog math block calculates the value AQ of an equation formed from the user defined operands and operators Symbol in IDEC SmartRelay En Par Aw Wiring Input En Description A change in the status from 0 to 1 at input En Enable enables the analog math function block Parameter V1 First operand value V2 Second operand value V3 Third operand value V4 Fourth operand value Op1 First operator Op2 Second operator Op3 Third operator Pri Priority of first operation Pr2 Priority of second operation Pr3 Priority of third operation Qen gt 0 0 Reset value of AQ to 0 when En 0 1 Retain last value of AQ when En 0 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output AQ The output AQ is the result of the equation formed from the operand values and operators AQ will be set to 32767 if a div
288. the IDEC SmartRelay solution Off pulse triggered with timer Mo Su 20 00 20 01 Mo Su 21 00 21 01 Luminous row 3 Corridor side Q3 Luminous row 4 Corridor side Daylight o4 control switch Luminous row 1 Corridor side Q1 Luminous row 2 Corridor side Advantages of the IDEC SmartRelay solution e You can connect the lamps directly to the IDEC SmartRelay provided the power consumption does not exceed the switching capacity of the various outputs Higher loads should be switched with a contactor relay Connect the daylight control switch directly to an input of the IDEC SmartRelay e You do not need an external timer because this function is integrated in the IDEC SmartRelay e Due to the reduced amount of switchgear you can install a smaller and space saving distribution cabinet e Fewer devices are required The lighting system can be easily modified e Additional switching times can be set as required sequential circuit for the off pulses at the end of the day e The function of the daylight control switch can be easily applied to all lamps or to a modified group of lamps 292 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Applications 8 7 Service water pump The use of rainwater as an addition to the drinking water supply is gaining importance This saves cost and helps to protect the environment For example rainwate
289. the analog output AQ1 and connect the Analog trigger B006 in front of the Analog Multiplexer to convert the internal values less than zero to internal values equal to or more than zero IDEC SmartRelay Manual 187 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions In the block diagram below the analog output module operates as the lower part of the timing chart example BOOB BUU AM Gain 1 0 Offset 0 WU On 0 Varn OED Was Function block number with the actual F value Ax to be outputted to AQ1 Point 0 VW4 0 Point O Analog output value T 1000 1000 Internal value Ax Set each parameter of the functions referring to the table below Parameters Analog trigger A Gain 1 00 B006 in the above table B Offset 0 On On threshold 0 Off Off threshold 0 p Number of decimals arbitrary Analog Multiplexer Vi 0 B007 in the above table V2 arbitrary V3 Function block number with the actual value Ax to be outputted from AQ1 V4 arbitrary p Number of decimals arbitrary 188 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Scaling an analog input value You can influence the analog input value of a potentiometer by interconnecting an analog input with an analog amplifier and an analog memory mark
290. the password you can quickly access letters at the end of the alphabet in this example English by using the A button Press A once to select z Press A twice to select Y etc Let us assign the password AA to our first circuit program The display now shows Old No Password New This procedure is the same as for entering the name of the circuit program Select New and enter 3 Select A Press V 4 Move to the next letter Press gt 5 Select A Press V The display now shows Old No Password New Aw 6 Confirm the password Press OK Your circuit program is now protected with the password AA and you are returned to the programming menu Note You can cancel the input of a new password with ESC In this case IDEC SmartRelay returns to the programming menu without saving the password You can also set your password using WindLGC You cannot edit a password protected circuit program on IDEC SmartRelay or upload it to WindLGC unless you enter the correct password To allow you to create and edit a circuit program for a protected module Card you first need to assign a password to this new program see Chapter 6 1 IDEC SmartRelay Manual 79 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Changing the password from the IDEC SmartRelay Base module You must kn
291. the top input of the added Par block The B1 block previously connected to Q1 is automatically connected to the uppermost input of the new block Note that you can only interconnect digital inputs with digital outputs or analog inputs with analog outputs The old block will otherwise be lost The off delay block has three inputs At the top is the trigger input Trg you use to start the off delay time In our example the OR block B1 triggers the off delay You reset the time and the output with a signal at the reset input Set the off delay time at parameter T of the input Par In our example we do not use the reset input of the off delay function and we identify it with an x connector B2 This is what the display should Bl eT now show x Q1 Par 88 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Assigning block parameters Now you set the off delay time T 1 Move the cursor to Par if it not already at this position Press A or V 2 Switch to editing mode Press OK IDEC SmartRelay shows the parameters in the parameter assignment window T The block parameter B2 is a time function B2 R T 00 00s j a Time value imebase To change the time value e Press lt and gt to position the cursor e Press A and to modify the value at the relevant posit
292. tr com Email info clrwtr com 171 IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameter p number of decimals Does not apply to the display of On Off and Ax values in a message text Does not apply to the comparison of On and Off values The compare function ignores the decimal point Timing diagram 1000 On Off l Ax 0 4 j n d i Q Functional description The function fetches the analog signal at input Ax Ax is multiplied by the value of the A gain parameter and the value at parameter B offset is added to product i e Axegain offset actual value of Ax Output Q is set or reset depending on the set thresholds See the calculation rule below Calculation rule e Ifthe On threshold gt Off threshold then Q 1 if the actual value Ax gt On Q 0 if the actual value Ax lt Off e Ifthe On threshold lt Off threshold then Q 1 if On lt actual value Ax lt Off 172 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Setting the Par parameter The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application View in programming mode example B 3 1 lt Parameter protection mode On 04000 lt on threshold Of f 02000 lt Off threshold Press gt B3 2 A 01 00 Gain B 00000 lt Offset Decimals in the
293. transition O to 1 Tis the time after which the output is reset output signal transition 1 to 0 Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q Qis set when the configured time Ty has expired and Trg is still set It is reset on expiration of the time T_ if the trigger Trg has not been set again 136 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Parameters T and TL Note the preset values for the parameters Ty and T in Chapter 4 3 2 The on delay and off delay times for parameters Ty and TL can be based on the actual value of another already configured function You can use the actual values of the following functions e Analog comparator actual value Ax Ay see Chapter 4 4 18 e Analog trigger actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 16 e Analog amplifier actual value Ax see Chapter 4 4 20 e Analog multiplexer actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 26 e Analog ramp control actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 27 Analog math actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 30 e Pl controller actual value AQ see Chapter 4 4 28 Up down counter actual value Cnt see Chapter 4 4 13 Select the required function by the block number The timebase is configurable For information on valid timebase ranges and parameter preset refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Timing diagram
294. ts automatically 244 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Configuring IDEC SmartRelay 5 2 5 Setting the start screen You can select the default setting for the start screen that IDEC SmartRelay and the Text Display will display in RUN mode You make this selection from the parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu StartScreen menu item To select the start screen 1 Select parameter assignment mode see Chapter 5 1 2 On the parameter assignment menu select Set Press Vor A 3 Confirm Set Press OK 4 Move to StartScreen Press Aor V 5 Confirm StartScreen Press OK IDEC SmartRelay shows the following display gt Cl ock Input DI StartScreen Clock The current setting of the start screen is shown in the bottom row The default setting is Clock You can choose between the display of the current time of day and date or the values of the digital inputs 6 Select the desired default setting Press Aor Y 7 To confirm your entry Press OK IDEC SmartRelay displays your selection Power the IDEC SmartRelay base module off then on to make your changes take effect When IDEC SmartRelay is in RUN mode both IDEC SmartRelay and the Text Display will display the start screen that you selected IDEC SmartRelay Manual 245 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email i
295. ursor keys for manual intervention Vv in the circuit program ESC key What is meant by IDEC SmartRelay is in RUN In RUN mode IDEC SmartRelay executes the circuit program To do so IDEC SmartRelay first reads the status at the inputs determines the status of the outputs by means of the user program and switches these on or off according to your settings This is how IDEC SmartRelay indicates the I O status F Input output status is 1 Q TE 0 123456789 inverted 0 123456789 1 0123456789 Nput output status is 0 not 1 0123456 2 01234 inverted i In this example only the inputs 11 115 Q8 and Q12 are set high IDEC SmartRelay Manual 85 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay Status indication on the display T t L1 ua y When switch S1 is Let us examine closed the status at this using our 4 2 15 input 11 is hi example IDEC SmartRelay we computes the output 0 123456789 1 0123456789 states by means of the fasa circuit program 0 223456789 1 0123456 Output Q1 1 in this case When Q1 1 IDEC R Age SmartRelay sets relay N Z Q1 and the load 3 6 7 Second circuit program Up to this point you have successfully created your first circuit and assigned
296. ut box blank 3 Confirm the blank password Press OK The password is cleared and you are returned to the programming menu Note This action disables the password prompt and thus permits access without a password Let the password prompt be deactivated for the time being in order to accelerate progress in our further exercises and examples Password Wrong Password When the user inputs the wrong password and confirms the input with OK IDEC SmartRelay does not open editing mode but returns to the programming menu This repeats itself over and again until you input the correct password Changing IDEC SmartRelay from RUN to STOP mode from the Text Display A change from RUN mode to STOP mode from the Text Display requires password entry if one is assigned You must know the existing password if one is assigned If there is no password assigned on the IDEC SmartRelay Base module the Text Display will not prompt you for password entry To change IDEC SmartRelay from RUN mode to STOP mode from the Text Display when IDEC SmartRelay is password protected follow these steps IDEC SmartRelay Manual 81 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming IDEC SmartRelay 1 Onthe Text Display press ESC to switch IDEC SmartRe lay from RUN mode to STOP mode Text Display shows the following menu gt Stop Set Param Msg Config Set 2 Pr
297. ut voltage L e Signal 0 lt 5VDC lt 5VDC Signal 1 gt 8 5 VDC gt 8 5 V DC Input current at e Signal 0 lt 0 85 mA I3 16 lt 0 85 mA e Signal 1 lt 0 05 mA 11 12 I7 18 gt 1 5 mA gt 1 5 mA I3 16 gt 0 1 mA 11 12 17 18 314 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE FL1B M08B2R2 Delay time at typ 1 5 ms typ 1 5 ms e Otol lt 1 0 ms I3 16 e 1to0 typ 1 5 ms typ 1 5 ms lt 1 0 ms 13 16 Line length unshielded 100 m 100 m Analog inputs Number 4 I1 AI3 I12 Al4 I7 Al1 I8 Al2 Range 0 10 VDC input impedance 72 kQ Cycle time for analog value 300 ms generation max Input voltage 28 8 V DC Line length 10m shielded and twisted Error limit 1 5 at full scale Digital outputs Number 4 4 Output type Relay outputs Relay outputs Electrical isolation Yes Yes Dielectric Strength between power input terminals and output terminals 2 500 V AC 1 minute 500 V DC 1 minute 2 500 V AC 1 minute 500 V DC 1 minute In groups of 1 1 Control of a digital input Yes Yes Continuous current lth per terminal max 10 A per relay max 5 A per relay Surge current max 30A max 30A Incandescent lamp load 25000 1000 W 1000 W switching cycles at Fluorescent tubes with ballast 10x58 W 10x58 W 25000 swit
298. uts Electrical isolation Yes Dielectric Strength between power input terminals and output terminals 2 500 V AC 1minute 500 V DC 1 minute In groups of 1 Control of a digital input Yes Continuous current lin max 10A per relay Surge current max 30A Incandescent lamp load 25000 switching cycles at e 230 240 V AC 1000 W e 100 110 VAC 500 W Fluorescent tubes with ballast 25000 10 x 58 W at 230 240 V AC switching cycles Fluorescent tubes conventionally compensated 25000 switching cycles 1 x 58 W at 230 240 V AC Fluorescent tubes uncompensated 25000 switching cycles 10 x 58 W at 230 240 V AC Short circuit proof cos 1 Power protection B16 600A Short circuit proof cos 0 5 to 0 7 Power protection B16 900A Derating none across the entire temperature range Parallel output circuits for power increase Not permitted Protection of output relay if desired max 16 A characteristic B16 300 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay Manual Technical data FL1E H12RCC FL1E B12RCC Minimum Switching Load 10 mA 12 V DC Initial Contact Resistance 100 mQ maximum at 1A 24V DC Mechanical Life 10 000 000 operations minimum no load 10 Hz Electrical Life 100 000 operations minimum rated resistive load 1800 operations hou
299. w clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 2 Installing removing IDEC SmartRelay Dimensions The IDEC SmartRelay installation dimensions are compliant with DIN 43880 IDEC SmartRelay can be snap mounted to 35 mm DIN rails to EN 50022 or on the wall IDEC SmartRelay width e Text Display has a width of 128 2 mm which corresponds to 8 subunits e IDEC SmartRelay base modules have a width of 72 mm which corresponds to 4 subunits e IDEC SmartRelay expansion modules have a width of 36 mm which corresponds to 2 or 4 subunits Note The figure below shows you an example of the installation and removal of a FL1E H12RCC and a digital module The measures shown apply to all other IDEC SmartRelay Base versions and expansion modules A Warning Always switch off power before you remove and insert an expansion module IDEC SmartRelay Manual 25 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 2 1 DIN rail mounting Mounting How to mount an IDEC SmartRelay base module and a digital module onto a DIN rail IDEC SmartRelay base module 1 Hook the IDEC SmartRelay base module onto the rail 2 Push down the lower end to snap it on The mounting interlock at the rear must engage ee IDEC SmartRelay digital module
300. wing 90 Signal status transitions 36 Simulation 259 Softkey 205 340 Software 259 Special functions 128 Analog amplifier 185 Analog comparator 177 Analog differential trigger 174 Analog math 225 Analog math error detection 230 Analog multiplexer 210 Analog ramp control 212 Analog trigger 171 Analog value monitoring 182 Analog watchdog 182 Basics 121 Counter Operating hours counter 164 Up down counter 161 Current impulse relay 191 Delay Off 135 On Off 136 Edge triggered interval time delay relay 140 Frequency trigger 168 Interval time delay relay Pulse output 139 Latching relay 190 Message texts 193 PI controller 216 Pulse generator asynchronous 142 Pulse Width Modulator PWM 222 Random generator 144 Retentive On delay 138 Seven day time switch 150 Shift register 208 Softkey 205 Switch IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Index Comfort 148 Stairwell light 146 Twelve month time switch 155 Stairwell light switch 146 Start 84 Start screen 245 Startup characteristics 326 Startup Marker 111 Stop 234 Subunits 25 Summertime 97 Summertime wintertime conversion 97 239 Clock 97 enabling 98 S W Time 97 user define parameters 100 Switch Dual function switch 148 Stairwell light switch 146 Switched current maximum 45 Synchronization 101 239 Sync 101 Clock 101 enabling 102 T T Parameter 123 Technical data 297
301. witch is to be set daily from 06 30 h to 08 00 h The output should also be set every Tuesday from 03 10 h to 04 15 h and on the weekends from 16 30 h to 23 10 h This requires three cams Here are the parameter assignment screen forms of the cams No 1 2 and 3 based on the timing diagram shown earlier IDEC SmartRelay Manual 153 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions Cam1 Cam2 Cam3 Result 154 Cam No1 must set the output of the seven day time switch daily from 06 30 h to 08 00 h Bl 1 D MTWTFSS On 06 30 Of f 08 00 Cam No2 must set the output of the seven day time switch every Tuesday from 03 10 h to 04 15 h Bl 2 D T On 03 10 Off 04 15 Cam No3 must set the output of the seven day time switch switch every Saturday and Sunday from 16 30 h to 23 10 h Bl 3 Sesess On 16 30 Of f 23 10 Cam 1 21 1 1 1 si 3 1 8 2 LL ILIL a Monday Wednesday Friday Sunday Tuesday Thursday Saturday IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 12 Twelve month time switch Short description The output is controlled by means of a configurable on off date You can configure the timer to activate on a yearly monthly or user defined time b
302. xpired A 1 to 0 transition at input EN triggers a random off delay time between 0 s and T The output is reset after the off delay time has expired provided input En remains lo at least for the duration of this time The time is reset if the signal at input En changes to 1 again before the off delay time has expired The time expired is reset after a power failure IDEC SmartRelay Manual 145 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay functions 4 4 9 Stairwell Light Switch Short description An input edge triggers a configurable and retriggerable time The output is reset after this time has expired A warning signal can be output before this time has expired to warn of the impending shutdown Symbol in IDEC Wiring Description SmartRelay Input Trg A signal at input Trg Trigger triggers Try Il the off delay time for the stairwell Light Par JJ L4 Switch Parameter T represents the off delay time of the output output signal transition 1 to 0 T determines the triggering time for the pre warning T determines the length of the pre warning signal Retentivity No retentivity R The status is retentive Output Q Q is reset after the time T has expired A warning signal can be output before this time has expired Parameter T T and T Note the defaults of the T parameters listed in Chapter 4 3 2 The off del
303. y power to expansion modules before the base module When supplying power to expansion modules after the base module expansion modules may not be recognized by the base module When using different power supplies the fast transient burst immunity IEC61000 4 4 will be 1 kV power supply A 100 to 240V AC DC module cannot be connected to the right side of a 12 24V DC 24V DC or 24V AC DC module For analog input module and AS Interface communication module a module of any voltage can be connected to the left side To the right side however a 100 to 240V AC DC module cannot be connected IDEC SmartRelay Manual 23 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IDEC SmartRelay installation and wiring 2 1 3 Compatibility The Text Display module can only be used with equipment series FL1E You cannot edit message texts from the IDEC SmartRelay base module that contain any of the following parameters e Par Time Date EnTime EnDate You can only edit such message texts from WindLGC When using FL1D K2B2 and FL1D K2BM2 with equipment series FL1C or FL1D the functions are limited to the ones available on this equipment You cannot use the module with equipment series FL1B or earlier All other expansion modules are completely compatible with the basic modules of equipment series FL1B FL1C FL1D and FL1E 24 IDEC SmartRelay Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web ww
304. z Inductive load 0 5 Hz Notice For fluorescent lamps with capacitors the technical data of fluorescent lamp ballasts must also be considered If the maximum allowed surge current is exceeded fluorescent lamps must be switched with appropriate contactor relays IDEC SmartRelay Manual 313 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data A 8 Technical data FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE and FL1B M08B2R2 Power supply FL1E H12RCE FL1E B12RCE FL1B M08B2R2 Input voltage 12 24 V DC 12 24 V DC Permissible range 10 8 28 8 V DC 10 8 28 8 V DC Reverse polarity protection Yes Yes Inrush current 1 6Aat12VDC 7 48 A at 24 V DC Power consumption e 12VDC 60 175 mA 30 140 mA 24VDC 40 100mA 20 75 mA Voltage failure buffering e 12VDC typ 2 ms typ 2 ms 24V DC typ 5 ms typ 5 ms Power loss e 12VDC 0 7 2 1 W 0 3 1 7 W 24V DC 1 0 2 4 W 0 4 1 8 W Backup of the real time clock at typ 80 hours without 25 C battery cartridge typ 2 years with battery cartridge Accuracy of the real time clock typ 2 s day Electrical isolation No No Digital inputs Number 8 4 Electrical isolation No No High speed inputs 4 13 14 15 16 Input frequency Normal input max 4 Hz max 4 Hz e High speed input max 5 kHz not applicable for this module Inp

FL1E Series User`s Manual - Clearwater Technologies Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents